[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2016158362A1 - Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern - Google Patents

Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016158362A1
WO2016158362A1 PCT/JP2016/058045 JP2016058045W WO2016158362A1 WO 2016158362 A1 WO2016158362 A1 WO 2016158362A1 JP 2016058045 W JP2016058045 W JP 2016058045W WO 2016158362 A1 WO2016158362 A1 WO 2016158362A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
photosensitive layer
component
dry film
group
resin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2016/058045
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
健一 岩下
泰治 村上
中村 彰宏
藤本 大輔
正樹 森田
明子 伊藤
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Resonac Corp
Original Assignee
Hitachi Chemical Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2015066538A external-priority patent/JP2018087832A/en
Priority claimed from JP2015087885A external-priority patent/JP2018087835A/en
Application filed by Hitachi Chemical Co Ltd filed Critical Hitachi Chemical Co Ltd
Publication of WO2016158362A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016158362A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G69/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a carboxylic amide link in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G69/02Polyamides derived from amino-carboxylic acids or from polyamines and polycarboxylic acids
    • C08G69/26Polyamides derived from amino-carboxylic acids or from polyamines and polycarboxylic acids derived from polyamines and polycarboxylic acids
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08GMACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED OTHERWISE THAN BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING UNSATURATED CARBON-TO-CARBON BONDS
    • C08G73/00Macromolecular compounds obtained by reactions forming a linkage containing nitrogen with or without oxygen or carbon in the main chain of the macromolecule, not provided for in groups C08G12/00 - C08G71/00
    • C08G73/06Polycondensates having nitrogen-containing heterocyclic rings in the main chain of the macromolecule
    • C08G73/10Polyimides; Polyester-imides; Polyamide-imides; Polyamide acids or similar polyimide precursors
    • C08G73/14Polyamide-imides
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L63/00Compositions of epoxy resins; Compositions of derivatives of epoxy resins
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C08ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
    • C08LCOMPOSITIONS OF MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS
    • C08L77/00Compositions of polyamides obtained by reactions forming a carboxylic amide link in the main chain; Compositions of derivatives of such polymers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/11Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having cover layers or intermediate layers, e.g. subbing layers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/22Secondary treatment of printed circuits
    • H05K3/28Applying non-metallic protective coatings

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to a dry film, a cured product thereof, a laminate, and a method for forming a resist pattern.
  • semiconductor components such as LSIs and chips have become more highly integrated, and the form of semiconductor components has rapidly increased in number and size. Has changed. Further, packaging forms such as a package-on-package in which a semiconductor device is stacked on a semiconductor device are actively performed, and it is expected that the mounting density of the semiconductor device will be further increased in the future.
  • vias openings
  • the number of flip chip pins mounted on a printed wiring board increases, it is necessary to provide as many vias as the number of pins.
  • conventional printed wiring boards have a low mounting density, and the semiconductor to be mounted Since the number of pins of the device is designed from several thousand pins to around 10,000 pins, it is not necessary to provide vias having a small diameter and a narrow pitch.
  • each via must be formed one by one, and it takes time to provide a large number of vias.
  • the adhesive force between the insulating layer and the plated copper is not sufficient, and the conductor pattern may peel off.
  • An object of the present disclosure is to solve the above-described problems and to form a dry film that can form a resist pattern that has excellent adhesion to plated copper and that has excellent resolution, and a cured product, laminate, and the dry film. It is to provide a method of forming a resist pattern using
  • the dry film of the present disclosure includes a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, and the non-photosensitive layer includes a thermosetting resin.
  • the non-photosensitive layer is used as an insulating layer when, for example, a multilayer wiring board is manufactured, and a conductor pattern (wiring layer) can be formed by plating the surface thereof.
  • the non-photosensitive layer improves the adhesion between the insulating layer formed from the non-photosensitive layer and the conductor pattern formed by plating on the insulating layer, and the electric circuit of the formed circuit Reliability can be improved.
  • the non-photosensitive layer can also be called an adhesion auxiliary layer. Since the non-photosensitive layer of the present disclosure has low solubility in a chemical solution such as a developer, it has been found that the surface roughness after the roughening treatment is small.
  • the present inventors have shown that the non-photosensitive layer in the dry film of the present disclosure has better adhesion to the plated copper than the single insulating layer obtained by mixing the non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer of the present disclosure. It was found that it can be secured.
  • the dry film of the present disclosure not only the via can be formed without using a laser, but also a finer via pattern can be formed as compared with the case where a laser is used. That is, it has been found that by using the above-described dry film, a fine via can be formed by combining the non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, by forming an insulating layer using the dry film of the present disclosure, the generation of via residues can be suppressed, and the insulation reliability between layers can be improved.
  • the non-photosensitive layer preferably contains (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-1) component: epoxy resin curing agent, and (C) component: resin having amide group or imide group.
  • the non-photosensitive layer further contains (E) component: an ester group-containing compound.
  • the non-photosensitive layer preferably contains (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-2) component: epoxy resin curing accelerator, and (E) component: ester group-containing compound.
  • the non-photosensitive layer has a small surface roughness after the ultraviolet irradiation treatment and can ensure good adhesion to the plated copper.
  • the non-photosensitive layer further contains (D) component: an inorganic filler.
  • the thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer is preferably 10 ⁇ m or less.
  • the photosensitive layer has (F) component: a resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group, and (G) component: at least one selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring and an alicyclic ring, and a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group.
  • the dry film according to claim 8 comprising 20 to 70 parts by mass of the component (H) with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (F).
  • the photosensitive layer further contains a component (D ′): an inorganic filler.
  • the component (D ′) is preferably an inorganic filler having an average primary particle size of 100 nm or less.
  • the component (D ′) is preferably silica.
  • the above dry film can be used for forming an interlayer insulating layer.
  • the present disclosure also provides a cured product obtained using the dry film.
  • the method for forming a resist pattern of the present disclosure includes a step of forming a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer on a substrate in this order using the dry film, a step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern, And developing the exposed photosensitive layer and subjecting it to a heat treatment.
  • the resist pattern forming method further includes a heat treatment step before the exposed photosensitive layer is developed.
  • the present disclosure is a dry film including a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, wherein a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed in this order on a substrate, the photosensitive layer is exposed, and the dry film is formed.
  • a dry film is provided in which an unexposed portion of a photosensitive layer is eluted and a non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and a via can be formed at a location where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by heat treatment after development.
  • vias can be formed without using a laser, and a large number of vias can be easily formed at a time.
  • the present disclosure provides a laminate in which a base material, a photosensitive layer, and a non-photosensitive layer containing a thermosetting resin are laminated in this order.
  • the resist pattern forming method of the present disclosure includes a step of forming a photosensitive layer by applying a photosensitive composition on a substrate, and a non-photosensitive layer by applying a resin composition containing a thermosetting resin on the photosensitive layer. A step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern, and a step of developing and heat-treating the exposed photosensitive layer.
  • the present disclosure it is possible to provide a dry film capable of forming a resist pattern that is excellent in adhesiveness with plated copper and excellent in resolution. Moreover, according to this indication, the formation method of the resist pattern using the hardened
  • (meth) acrylate means at least one of acrylate and methacrylate corresponding thereto.
  • the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. It is.
  • the term “layer” includes not only a structure having a shape formed on the entire surface but also a structure having a shape formed on a part when observed as a plan view.
  • a numerical range indicated by using “to” indicates a range including the numerical values described before and after “to” as the minimum value and the maximum value, respectively.
  • the upper limit value or lower limit value of a numerical range of a certain step may be replaced with the upper limit value or lower limit value of the numerical range of another step.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a dry film 10 according to this embodiment.
  • the dry film 10 according to this embodiment includes a non-photosensitive layer 3 and a photosensitive layer 5.
  • the non-photosensitive layer 3 is a layer formed using a resin composition described later
  • the photosensitive layer 5 is a layer formed using a photosensitive composition described later.
  • the dry film 10 may be formed on the support 1 so that the non-photosensitive layer 3 and the support 1 are in contact with each other. That is, the dry film 10 according to the present embodiment may include the support 1, the non-photosensitive layer 3, and the photosensitive layer 5 in this order.
  • a protective layer 7 that covers the photosensitive layer 5 may be further provided on the photosensitive layer 5.
  • a polymer film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used.
  • the support 1 polymer film
  • examples of the support 1 (polymer film) include polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate.
  • the thickness of the support 1 (polymer film) is preferably 5 to 25 ⁇ m.
  • One polymer film may be used as the support 1 and the other polymer film as the protective layer 7.
  • the protective layer 7 for example, a polymer film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used.
  • the protective layer 7 include polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate.
  • the non-photosensitive layer 3 and the photosensitive layer 5 can be formed by applying a resin composition and a photosensitive composition on a support or a protective layer, respectively.
  • the coating method include a dipping method, a spray method, a bar coating method, a roll coating method, and a spin coating method.
  • the dry film of this embodiment can be obtained by the following method. First, the non-photosensitive layer 3 is formed by coating and drying on a polymer film or copper foil serving as a support using the resin composition. Next, the photosensitive composition is applied on the non-photosensitive layer 3 and dried to form the photosensitive layer 5, whereby the dry film of this embodiment is obtained. In addition, the dry film of this embodiment may be obtained by bonding the non-photosensitive layer 3 formed on the support 1 and the protective layer 7 formed with the photosensitive layer 5 together.
  • the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer 3 may be 10 ⁇ m or less, 0.1 to 10 ⁇ m, 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m, or 0.2 to 1.5 ⁇ m. 0.3 to 1 ⁇ m.
  • the transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer 3 may be 80% or more, 85% or more, or 90% or more. Since the transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer 3 is 80% or more, a decrease in sensitivity of the photosensitive layer 5 can be sufficiently suppressed, so that the resolution is improved.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be less than 100%.
  • the transmittance can be measured using a known method.
  • the preferable range of the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 varies depending on the application, but the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 is preferably 1 to 50 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 40 ⁇ m, and still more preferably 10 to 30 ⁇ m. . By setting the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 in the above-described range, the resolution tends to be further improved.
  • the resin composition of the present embodiment does not have photosensitivity and is used for forming a non-photosensitive layer.
  • the resin composition of this embodiment contains a thermosetting resin.
  • the thermosetting resin is not particularly limited as long as it is a component composed of a reactive compound that causes a crosslinking reaction by heat.
  • epoxy resin for example, epoxy resin, cyanate ester resin, maleimide resin, allyl nadiimide resin, phenol resin, Urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, silicone resin, resorcinol formaldehyde resin, xylene resin, furan resin, polyurethane resin, ketone resin, triallyl cyanurate resin, polyisocyanate resin, Examples include resins containing tris (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, resins containing triallyl trimellitate, thermosetting resins synthesized from cyclopentadiene, thermosetting resins by trimerization of aromatic dicyanamide, etc. It is.
  • the resin composition may contain a curing agent for a thermosetting resin.
  • the resin composition of this embodiment may contain (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-1) component: epoxy resin curing agent, and (C) component: resin having amide group or imide group.
  • the resin composition used to form the resin layer of the present embodiment includes (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-2) component: epoxy resin curing accelerator, and (E) component: ester group-containing compound. It may contain.
  • these components may be simply referred to as (A) component, (B-1) component, (B-2) component, (C) component, (E) component and the like.
  • the resin layer of this embodiment can be used suitably in the formation method provided with a plating process.
  • epoxy resin although a preferable compound changes with uses, it is preferable that it is a polyfunctional epoxy resin.
  • preferable epoxy resins include cresol novolak type epoxy resins, phenol novolak type epoxy resins, naphthol novolak type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, bisphenol S type epoxy resins, bisphenol T type epoxy resins, bisphenol Z type epoxy resins.
  • Tetrabromobisphenol A type epoxy resin biphenyl type epoxy resin, biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resin, tetramethylbiphenyl type epoxy resin, triphenyl type epoxy resin, tetraphenyl type epoxy resin, naphthol aralkyl type epoxy resin, naphthalenediol aralkyl type epoxy Resin, fluorene type epoxy resin, epoxy resin having dicyclopentadiene skeleton, epoxy having skeleton derived from butanediol Resin, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from pentadiol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from hexanediol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from heptanediol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from octanediol, alicyclic epoxy resin, etc.
  • biphenyl aralkyl epoxy resin or an epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from hexanediol is more preferable.
  • examples of commercially available products include biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resins (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: NC-3000). These epoxy resins may be used in combination of two or more from the viewpoint of further improving the insulation reliability and heat resistance.
  • the content of the component (A) is preferably 20 to 90 parts by weight, and preferably 30 to 80 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content of the resin composition used for forming the non-photosensitive layer. It is more preferable.
  • solid content refers to the component in compositions other than volatile substances, such as a water
  • ⁇ (B-1) component> As an epoxy resin hardening
  • curing agent although a preferable compound changes with uses, for example, phenol resins, acid anhydrides, amines, hydragits, etc. are mentioned.
  • phenol resin a novolac type phenol resin such as a cresol novolac type phenol resin, a resol type phenol resin, or the like can be used.
  • acid anhydrides phthalic anhydride, benzophenone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, methyl hymic anhydride and the like can be used.
  • As the amines dicyandiamide, diaminodiphenylmethane, guanylurea and the like can be used.
  • the content of component (B-1) is preferably 0.5 to 1.5 equivalents relative to the epoxy group of component (A).
  • the content of the epoxy resin curing agent is 0.5 to 1.5 equivalents relative to the epoxy group of the component (A)
  • Tg glass transition temperature
  • Component (B-2) that can be used in the resin composition of the present embodiment As an epoxy resin curing accelerator, a preferred compound varies depending on the use, but a general curing accelerator used for curing component (A) Can be used.
  • epoxy resin curing accelerator examples include 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole, 1-benzyl-2-methylimidazole, 2-heptadecylimidazole, 2-undecylimidazole, 1-cyanoethyl- Imidazole compounds such as 2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate; Organic phosphite compounds such as triphenylphosphine and tributylphosphine; Organic phosphite compounds such as trimethylphosphite and triethylphosphite; Ethyltriphenylphosphonium bromide and tetraphenyl Phosphonium salt compounds such as phosphonium tetraphenylborate; Trialkylamines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; 4-dimethylaminopyridine, benzyldimethylamine, 2,4,6-to Amine compounds such as bis (dimethylaminomethyl)
  • the content of the component (B-2) is preferably 0.02 to 1.5 parts by mass, and 0.8 to 1.3 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (A). It is more preferable. If the amount is 0.02 parts by mass or more, the component (A) tends to be sufficiently cured and heat resistance can be maintained. On the other hand, if the amount is 1.5 parts by mass or less, the storage stability of the resin composition, B The handleability of the staged resin composition is improved.
  • ⁇ (C) component examples include polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide.
  • Examples of diamines that can be used in these production include aromatic diamines and aliphatic diamines.
  • the component (C) can be said to be a heat resistant resin.
  • aromatic diamines include diaminobenzene, diaminotoluene, diaminophenol, diaminodimethylbenzene, diaminomesitylene, diaminonitrobenzene, diaminodiazobenzene, diaminonaphthalene, diaminobiphenyl, diaminodimethoxybiphenyl, diaminodiphenyl ether, diaminodimethyldiphenyl ether, methylene Diamine, methylenebis (dimethylaniline), methylenebis (methoxyaniline), methylenebis (dimethoxyaniline), methylenebis (ethylaniline), methylenebis (diethylaniline), methylenebis (ethoxyaniline), methylenebis (diethoxyaniline), isopropylidenedianiline, Diaminobenzophenone, diaminodimethylbenzophenone, diamy Anthraquinone, diaminobenz
  • aliphatic diamine examples include ethylenediamine, propanediamine, hydroxypropanediamine, butanediamine, heptanediamine, hexanediamine, diaminodiethylamine, diaminopropylamine, cyclopentanediamine, cyclohexanediamine, azapentanediamine, and triazaundecadiamine. Etc. These aromatic diamines and aliphatic diamines may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the dicarboxylic acid used for the production of a resin having an amide group or an imide group include aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, and oligomers having carboxyl groups at both ends.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acid examples include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, biphenyldicarboxylic acid, methylene dibenzoic acid, thiodibenzoic acid, carbonyl dibenzoic acid, sulfonyl dibenzoic acid, naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, hydroxyisophthalic acid , Hydroxyphthalic acid, hydroxyterephthalic acid, dihydroxyisophthalic acid, dihydroxyterephthalic acid and the like. These aromatic dicarboxylic acids may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • oligomers having a carboxyl group at both ends include oligomers having a number average molecular weight of 200 to 10,000, preferably a number average molecular weight of 500 to 5,000.
  • Specific examples include polybutadiene having carboxyl groups at both ends, butadiene-acrylonitrile copolymer, styrene-butadiene copolymer, polyisoprene, ethylene propylene copolymer, polyether, polyester, polycarbonate, polyacrylate, polyacrylate.
  • examples include methacrylate, polyurethane, and silicone rubber.
  • NPC gel permeation chromatography
  • tetrahydrofuran is used as an eluent, and measurement is performed at a temperature of 30 ° C. and a flow rate of 1.0 mL / min.
  • a copolymer of polyamide and polybutadiene (also referred to as “polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin”) can be used from the viewpoint of further improving the adhesion to the plated copper.
  • a polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin include a phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide obtained by polycondensation of a diamine, a dicarboxylic acid having a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a polybutadiene having a carboxyl group at both ends.
  • a phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide is prepared by, for example, catalyzing a diamine, a phenolic hydroxyl group-containing dicarboxylic acid, and a polybutadiene having carboxyl groups at both ends in an organic solvent such as N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP). Can be obtained by polycondensation of a carboxyl group and an amino group in the presence of a phosphite ester and a pyridine derivative.
  • NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
  • dicarboxylic acid having a phenolic hydroxyl group and polybutadiene having a carboxyl group at both ends a dicarboxylic acid having no phenolic hydroxyl group may be added. Examples of such a commercially available phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin include BPAM-155 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • polyamideimide that can be contained as the component (C) for example, polyamideimide synthesized by a so-called isocyanate method by reaction of trimellitic anhydride or a reaction product of trimellitic anhydride and diamine with an aromatic diisocyanate.
  • isocyanate method for synthesizing polyamideimide a method in which an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and the above diamine compound are reacted in the presence of excess diamine compound and then a diisocyanate is reacted (for example, as described in Japanese Patent No. 2897186). Method) and a method of reacting an aromatic diamine compound and trimellitic anhydride (for example, a method described in JP-A No. 04-182466).
  • Examples of commercially available polyamide imide resins include Bilomax HR11NN and Bilomax HR16NN manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.
  • the polyimide that can be contained as the component (C) may be synthesized by a general synthesis method currently used industrially. For example, tetracarboxylic dianhydride and the above diamine are polymerized in equimolar amounts to obtain a polyamic acid that is a polyimide precursor, and then subjected to a dehydration reaction and a cyclization reaction using heating at 200 ° C. or higher or using a catalyst. By proceeding, polyimide can be obtained. When using a catalyst, an amine compound can be used, and a carboxylic acid anhydride may be used in combination as a dehydrating agent for quickly removing water generated by imidization.
  • (C) component mentioned above may each be used independently, and may be used in combination of 2 or more types.
  • the content of the component (C) is preferably 3 to 30% by mass, preferably 15 to 25% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the component (A), the component (B-1) and the component (C). More preferably.
  • the said resin composition may contain (D) component: an inorganic filler from a viewpoint of stabilizing a roughening shape and improving adhesiveness.
  • (D) component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • inorganic fillers examples include aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, calcium carbonate, calcium hydroxide, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, magnesium oxide, magnesium hydroxide, silica, or inorganic fillers derived from mineral products such as talc and mica. Can be mentioned.
  • examples of the silica include fused spherical silica, fused and ground silica, fumed silica, and sol-gel silica.
  • the type of the inorganic filler is not particularly limited, but the thermal expansion coefficient is preferably 5.0 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 6 / ° C. or less.
  • silica such as fused spherical silica, fumed silica, sol-gel silica, and the like is used. preferable. Among them, fumed silica or sol-gel silica is more preferable.
  • a silane coupling agent may be used.
  • a known particle size distribution meter When measuring the particle diameter of each inorganic filler, a known particle size distribution meter can be used.
  • the amount is preferably 1 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is part by mass.
  • the inorganic filler contained in the non-photosensitive layer preferably has an average primary particle size of 100 nm or less, and particularly 50 nm or less from the viewpoint of further excellent photosensitivity. Is preferred. When the average primary particle size is 100 nm or less, the resolution tends to be further improved.
  • the “primary particle size” is a value obtained by conversion from the specific surface area of particles actually measured by the BET method. In the BET method, an adsorbate (for example, an inert gas such as nitrogen) is physically adsorbed on the surface of solid particles at a low temperature, and the specific surface area can be estimated from the molecular cross-sectional area and adsorbed amount of the adsorbate.
  • Component (D) dispersed in the resin composition from the viewpoint of suppressing light scattering in the exposure wavelength region (for example, 300 to 450 nm) of the resin composition, that is, suppressing a decrease in transmittance in the exposure wavelength region.
  • the average particle diameter is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and still more preferably 30 nm or less.
  • the minimum of the average particle diameter of (D) component in a resin composition is not specifically limited, For example, it can be 5 nm or more.
  • the inorganic filler is preferably dispersed with a maximum particle size of 1 ⁇ m or less when dispersed in the resin composition, and is dispersed within 0.5 ⁇ m or less. More preferably, it is more preferable to be dispersed to 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the “average particle diameter” of the component (D) is the average particle diameter of the inorganic filler in a state dispersed in the resin composition, and is a value obtained by measurement as follows.
  • the resin composition 1000 After diluting (or dissolving) the resin composition 1000 times with methyl ethyl ketone, using a submicron particle analyzer (trade name: N5, manufactured by Beckman Coulter Co., Ltd.), in accordance with the international standard ISO 13321, The particles dispersed in the solvent at a refractive index of 1.38 are measured, and the particle size at an integrated value of 50% (volume basis) in the particle size distribution is taken as the average particle size. Further, the particle diameter at the integrated value 99.9% (volume basis) in the particle size distribution is defined as the maximum particle diameter.
  • a submicron particle analyzer trade name: N5, manufactured by Beckman Coulter Co., Ltd.
  • the dry film is exposed to the entire surface to prevent elution of the photosensitive layer, and then 1000 times using a solvent as described above. After dilution (or dissolution) in (volume ratio), measurement can be performed using the submicron particle analyzer.
  • the resin composition may contain (E) component: ester group-containing compound.
  • ester group-containing compound one or more ester groups are contained in one molecule, and an epoxy resin can be cured without containing a hydroxyl group.
  • aliphatic or aromatic carboxylic acid and aliphatic or aromatic hydroxy examples include ester compounds obtained from the compounds.
  • an ester compound composed of an aliphatic carboxylic acid, an aliphatic hydroxy compound, or the like can increase the solubility in an organic solvent and the compatibility with an epoxy resin by including an aliphatic chain.
  • an ester compound composed of an aromatic carboxylic acid, an aromatic hydroxy compound, or the like can improve the heat resistance of the resin composition by having an aromatic ring.
  • ester group-containing compound examples include, for example, a mixture of an aromatic carboxylic acid, a monohydric phenol compound, and a polyhydric phenol compound as raw materials, the aromatic carboxylic acid, the monohydric phenol compound, and a polyhydric compound.
  • An aromatic ester obtained by a condensation reaction with a phenolic hydroxyl group of a polyhydric phenol compound is mentioned.
  • aromatic carboxylic acid examples include those in which 2 to 4 hydrogen atoms of an aromatic ring such as benzene, naphthalene, biphenyl, diphenylpropane, diphenylmethane, diphenyl ether, diphenylsulfone, and benzophenone are substituted with a carboxyl group.
  • an aromatic ring such as benzene, naphthalene, biphenyl, diphenylpropane, diphenylmethane, diphenyl ether, diphenylsulfone, and benzophenone are substituted with a carboxyl group.
  • monohydric phenol type compound what substituted one hydrogen atom of the above-mentioned aromatic ring by the hydroxyl group is mentioned.
  • polyhydric phenol compound examples include those in which 2 to 4 hydrogen atoms of the aromatic ring are substituted with a hydroxyl group.
  • Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and benzenetricarboxylic acid.
  • Examples of the monohydric phenol compound include phenol, various cresols, ⁇ -naphthol, ⁇ -naphthol and the like.
  • Examples of the polyhydric phenol compounds include hydroquinone, resorcin, catechol, 4,4′-biphenol, 4,4′-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, bisphenol A, bisphenol, bisphenol S, bisphenol Z, brominated bisphenol A, and brominated.
  • Examples thereof include bisphenol F, brominated bisphenol S, methylated bisphenol S, various dihydroxynaphthalenes, various dihydroxybenzophenones, various trihydroxybenzophenones, various tetrahydroxybenzophenones, and phloroglycine.
  • the ester group-containing compound may be a resin having one or more ester groups in one molecule, and is also available as a commercial product. Examples include “EXB-9460”, “EXB-9460S”, “EXB-9470”, “EXB-9480”, “EXB-9420” manufactured by DIC Corporation, and “BPN80” manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc. . These ultraviolet active ester group-containing compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the ester group-containing compound is preferably 0.75 to 1.25 equivalents with respect to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the component (A).
  • it is 0.75 equivalent or more, sufficient tackiness and curability between the support and the non-photosensitive layer can be obtained sufficiently, and when it is 1.25 equivalent or less, sufficient curability, heat resistance and chemical resistance are obtained. It becomes easy to obtain.
  • the above resin composition is obtained by adding other components to the components (A) to (E) as necessary, sufficiently stirring and mixing them, and then standing until there are no bubbles.
  • a known kneading and dispersing method such as a kneader, ball mill, bead mill, three rolls, or nanomizer may be used.
  • the resin composition is mixed or diluted or dispersed in a solvent to form a varnish.
  • the solvent include methyl ethyl ketone, xylene, toluene, acetone, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, cyclohexanone, ethyl ethoxypropionate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide and the like. These solvents may be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the ratio of the solvent to the resin composition may be a conventionally used ratio, and the amount used can be adjusted according to the equipment for forming the non-photosensitive layer.
  • the resin composition can be further diluted or dispersed with the above solvent to prepare a varnish.
  • the photosensitive composition used to form the photosensitive layer of the present embodiment can be used in accordance with a desired purpose as long as its properties change (for example, it cures) when irradiated with light. It may be negative or positive.
  • the term “photosensitive” means that the photosensitive layer is exposed, then subjected to heat treatment after exposure, if necessary, and then developed (removed) using a developer for removing the photosensitive composition. ) Means that a resin pattern can be formed.
  • the photosensitive composition may contain (F) component: a resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group, (G ′) component: a crosslinking agent, and (I) component: a photosensitive acid generator.
  • Component (G ′) A crosslinking agent is a compound that forms a bond with a resin or a bond between crosslinkers by the action of heat, acid, or the like.
  • (G ′) component may contain a compound having (G) component: at least one selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring and an alicyclic ring, and having a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group,
  • (G) Component and (H) Both components may be included.
  • the photosensitive composition of this embodiment is (D ') component: an inorganic filler, (J) component: Amine, (K) component: Organic peroxide, (L) component: Silane cup as needed.
  • a ring agent, (M) component: leveling agent, (N) component: sensitizer can also be contained.
  • a phenolic low molecular weight compound can also be contained.
  • (D ') component As an inorganic filler, the thing similar to the above-mentioned (D) component can be used.
  • the amount is preferably 1 to 70 parts by mass and preferably 3 to 65 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition. More preferred.
  • the average primary particle size is preferably 100 nm or less. Moreover, it is preferable that the average particle diameter of (D ') is 100 nm or less. Thereby, the thermal expansion coefficient of the cured film can be reduced according to the content of the component (D ′). From the viewpoint of suppressing light scattering in the exposure wavelength region (for example, 300 to 450 nm) of the photosensitive composition, that is, suppressing a decrease in transmittance in the exposure wavelength region, it was dispersed in the photosensitive composition (D The average particle size of the component ') is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less.
  • the lower limit of the average particle diameter in the component (D ′) is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 5 nm or more.
  • the inorganic filler is preferably dispersed with a maximum particle diameter of 1 ⁇ m or less when dispersed in the photosensitive composition, and is dispersed within 0.5 ⁇ m or less. More preferably, it is more preferably dispersed to 0.1 ⁇ m or less.
  • the “average particle diameter” and “maximum particle diameter” of the component (D ′) are 50% (volume basis) of the integrated value in the particle size distribution of the inorganic filler dispersed in the photosensitive composition, respectively. And the integrated value of 99.9% (volume basis).
  • a cured film of a photosensitive layer or a photosensitive composition provided on a support is diluted (or dissolved) 1000 times (volume ratio) with a solvent as described above, and then the submicron. It can be measured using a particle analyzer.
  • the resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably a resin that is soluble in an alkaline aqueous solution, and particularly preferably a novolak resin.
  • a novolak resin can be obtained by condensing phenols and aldehydes in the presence of a catalyst.
  • phenols examples include phenol, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, o-ethylphenol, m-ethylphenol, p-ethylphenol, o-butylphenol, m-butylphenol, p-butylphenol, 2 , 3-xylenol, 2,4-xylenol, 2,5-xylenol, 2,6-xylenol, 3,4-xylenol, 3,5-xylenol, 2,3,5-trimethylphenol, 3,4,5- Examples include trimethylphenol, catechol, resorcinol, pyrogallol, ⁇ -naphthol, ⁇ -naphthol and the like.
  • aldehydes examples include formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, acetaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and the like.
  • novolak resins include phenol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, cresol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, phenol-naphthol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, and the like.
  • component (F) other than the novolak resin examples include polyhydroxystyrene and copolymers thereof, phenol-xylylene glycol condensation resin, cresol-xylylene glycol condensation resin, phenol-dicyclopentadiene condensation resin, and the like. It is done.
  • a component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • the weight average molecular weight is preferably 100,000 or less, and preferably 1,000 to 80,000 from the viewpoint of further improving the resolution, developability, thermal shock resistance, heat resistance, and the like of the obtained insulating film. Is more preferably 2000 to 50000, particularly preferably 2000 to 20000, and most preferably 4000 to 15000.
  • the content of the component (F) is 30 to 90 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition (excluding the component (D ′) when the component (D ′) is used). It is preferably 40 to 80 parts by mass. When the content of the component (F) is within this range, a film formed using the resulting photosensitive composition tends to be more excellent in developability with an alkaline aqueous solution.
  • the photosensitive composition of this embodiment contains (G) component: the compound which has at least 1 type chosen from the group which consists of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an alicyclic ring, and has a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group.
  • the aromatic ring means an aromatic hydrocarbon group (for example, a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms), and examples thereof include a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring.
  • the heterocyclic ring means a cyclic group having at least one nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom and the like (for example, a cyclic group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), such as a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrrolidinone ring, Examples include an oxazolidinone ring, an imidazolidinone ring, and a pyrimidinone ring.
  • the alicyclic ring means a cyclic hydrocarbon group having no aromaticity (for example, a cyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), such as a cyclopropane ring, a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, and A cyclohexane ring is mentioned.
  • An alkoxyalkyl group means a group in which an alkyl group is bonded to an alkyl group through an oxygen atom.
  • the two alkyl groups may be different from each other, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the component (G) when the photosensitive layer after the resin pattern is formed is heated and cured, the component (G) reacts with the component (F) to form a bridge structure, and the resin pattern is weak. And melting can be prevented.
  • a compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group (however, the component (F) is not included) or a compound having a hydroxymethylamino group or an alkoxymethylamino group can be preferably used.
  • the “compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group” used as the component (G) has a methylol group or an alkoxymethyl group, thereby increasing the dissolution rate of the unexposed area when developing with an alkaline aqueous solution as well as a crosslinking agent. , Sensitivity can be improved.
  • the molecular weight of the compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferably 94 to 2000, and preferably 108 to 2000 in terms of weight average molecular weight in consideration of the balance of solubility in alkali aqueous solution, photosensitivity, mechanical properties, and the like. More preferably, it is 108 to 1500.
  • the molecular weight can be measured by another method, and the average can be calculated.
  • Z represents a single bond or a divalent group
  • R 24 and R 25 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
  • R 26 and R 27 each independently represent 1 A and b each independently represents an integer of 1 to 3
  • c and d each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3.
  • examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group; an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms such as a vinyl group.
  • An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as a phenyl group; a group in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms of these hydrocarbon groups are substituted with a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom.
  • the compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (2).
  • X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent group, and a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the compound in which Z is a single bond is a biphenol (dihydroxybiphenyl) derivative.
  • the divalent group represented by Z include an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methylene group, an ethylene group and a propylene group, an alkylidene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms such as an ethylidene group, Arylene groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as phenylene groups, groups in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms of these hydrocarbon groups are substituted with halogen atoms such as fluorine atoms, sulfonyl groups, carbonyl groups, ether bonds, sulfides Examples include a bond and an amide bond.
  • Z is preferably a divalent group represented by the following general formula (4).
  • X 2 represents a single bond, an alkylene group (for example, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkylidene group (for example, an alkylidene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms), these Or a sulfonyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, a sulfide bond or an amide bond in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with a halogen atom.
  • R 28 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) or a haloalkyl group, and e represents an integer of 1 to 10.
  • the plurality of R 28 and X 2 may be the same as or different from each other.
  • the haloalkyl group means an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom.
  • Examples of the compound having a hydroxymethylamino group or an alkoxymethylamino group include (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) melamine, (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) glycoluril, (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) benzoguanamine, And (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) urea. Moreover, you may use the nitrogen-containing compound etc. which alkyl-etherified all or one part of the hydroxymethylamino group of these compounds.
  • examples of the alkyl group of the alkyl ether include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, or a mixture thereof, and may contain an oligomer component that is partially self-condensed.
  • the compound having an alkoxymethylamino group is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (5) or a compound represented by the general formula (6).
  • a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
  • the content of component (G) is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 45 parts by mass, and more preferably 10 to 35 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of component (F). More preferably.
  • the content of the component (G) is 5 parts by mass or more, the exposed part is sufficiently crosslinked, so that the resolution is further improved.
  • the photosensitive composition is placed on a desired support. It becomes easier to form a film, and the resolution is further improved.
  • the photosensitive composition of this embodiment contains an aliphatic compound having two or more functional groups selected from component (H): acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group, glycidyloxy group and hydroxyl group. Also good.
  • (H) component may have 2 or more types of different functional groups one by one, and may have 2 or more of 1 type of functional groups.
  • the compound is preferably an aliphatic compound having three or more functional groups. The upper limit of the number of functional groups is not particularly limited, but is 12 for example.
  • the photosensitive composition may be required to have excellent adhesion (tackiness) to the substrate.
  • the photosensitive composition which does not have sufficient tackiness, the photosensitive layer of an exposed part is easy to be removed by development processing, and there exists a tendency for the adhesiveness of a base material and a resist pattern to deteriorate.
  • the photosensitive layer contains the component (H)
  • the adhesiveness between the photosensitive composition and the substrate that is, the tackiness tends to be improved.
  • the molecular weight is preferably 92 to 2000, more preferably 106 to 1500, and still more preferably 134 to 1300 in terms of weight average molecular weight in consideration of balance.
  • the molecular weight can be measured by another method, and the average can be calculated.
  • component (H) examples include compounds represented by general formulas (7) to (10).
  • the “aliphatic compound” refers to a compound in which the main skeleton is an aliphatic skeleton and does not contain an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
  • R 1 , R 5 , R 16 and R 19 each represent a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a hydroxyl group or a group represented by the general formula (11);
  • R 21 represents a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, and
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 17 , R 18 and R 20 are each a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group, a methacryloyloxy group, a group represented by the general formula (12), or the general formula (13).
  • R 22 and R 23 represents a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, acryloyloxy indicates group or methacryloyloxy group, integers der of n and m are each 1 to 10 .
  • Examples of the compound having a glycidyloxy group include ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, diethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, tripropylene glycol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl.
  • Ether glycerin diglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, trimethylolethane triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, glycerol propoxylate triglycidyl ether, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol diglycidyl ether, diglycidyl-1,2 -Cyclohexane dicarboxylate and the like.
  • trimethylolethane triglycidyl ether or trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether is preferable in terms of excellent sensitivity and resolution.
  • the compound having a glycidyloxy group includes, for example, Epolite 40E, Epolite 100E, Epolite 70P, Epolite 200P, Epolite 1500NP, Epolite 1600, Epolite 80MF, Epolite 100MF (trade name, manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), alkyl type epoxy resin ZX-1542 (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name), Denacol EX-212L, Denacol EX-214L, Denacol EX-216L, Denacol EX-321L and Denacol EX-850L Name). These compounds having a glycidyloxy group can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the compound having an acryloyloxy group include EO-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, PO-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, EO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetraacrylate, PO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetraacrylate, ditrile Methylolpropane tetraacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol triacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, EO-modified trimethylolpropane acrylate, PO modified birds Chi
  • Examples of the compound having a methacryloyloxy group include EO-modified dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, PO-modified dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, EO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetramethacrylate, PO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetramethacrylate, ditriethyl.
  • Examples of the compound having a hydroxyl group include polyhydric alcohols such as dipentaerythritol, pentaerythritol, and glycerin. These compounds having a hydroxyl group can be used singly or in combination of two or more.
  • the functional group of the component (H) is preferably a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, more preferably a glycidyloxy group or an acryloyl group, and even more preferably an acryloyloxy group.
  • the component (H) is preferably an aliphatic compound having two or more glycidyloxy groups, more preferably an aliphatic compound having three or more glycidyloxy groups. More preferably, the aliphatic compound has a glycidyloxy group having a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or less.
  • the content of the component (H) is preferably 20 to 70 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 65 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (F). Preferably, the amount is 35 to 55 parts by mass.
  • the content of the component (H) is 20 parts by mass or more, sufficient tackiness can be obtained, and when the content is 70 parts by mass or less, a photosensitive composition is formed on a desired support. It becomes easy and the fall of resolution can be controlled.
  • the photosensitive composition of this embodiment may contain (I) component: a photosensitive acid generator.
  • the component (I) is a compound that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays and the like, and not only the (G) component is cross-linked by the generated acid, but also reacts with the phenolic hydroxyl group of the (F) component to develop a developer.
  • the solubility of the composition with respect to is greatly reduced.
  • methylol groups or alkoxyalkyl groups in component (G) or methylol groups or alkoxyalkyl groups in component (G) react with (F) component with dealcoholization. By doing so, a negative pattern can be formed.
  • the component (I) is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or the like.
  • an onium salt compound, a halogen-containing compound, a diazoketone compound, a sulfone compound, a sulfonic acid compound, a sulfonimide compound, and diazomethane for example, an onium salt compound, a halogen-containing compound, a diazoketone compound, a sulfone compound, a sulfonic acid compound, a sulfonimide compound, and diazomethane.
  • Compounds and the like Specific examples are shown below.
  • Onium salt compounds examples include iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, phosphonium salts, diazonium salts, and pyridinium salts.
  • Preferred examples of the onium salt compound include diaryl iodonium salts such as diphenyliodonium trifluoromethanesulfonate, diphenyliodonium p-toluenesulfonate, diphenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonate, diphenyliodonium hexafluorophosphate, and diphenyliodonium tetrafluoroborate; triphenylsulfonium Triarylsulfonium salts such as trifluoromethanesulfonate, triphenylsulfonium p-toluenesulfonate, triphenylsulfonium hexafluoroantimonate; 4-t-butylpheny
  • Sulfonimide compounds Specific examples of the sulfonimide compound include N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) succinimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) phthalimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) diphenylmaleimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyl).
  • the component (I) is preferably a compound having a trifluoromethanesulfonate group, a hexafluoroantimonate group, a hexafluorophosphate group or a tetrafluoroborate group in terms of excellent sensitivity and resolution.
  • (I) component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.
  • component (I) When component (I) is contained, the content of component (I) is based on 100 parts by mass of component (F) from the viewpoint of further improving the sensitivity, resolution, pattern shape, and the like of the photosensitive composition of the present embodiment. 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.3 to 10 parts by mass.
  • a solvent may be added to the photosensitive composition of this embodiment.
  • the solvent is preferably an organic solvent.
  • Such an organic solvent is not particularly limited.
  • ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate; propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl Propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers such as ether, propylene glycol monopropyl ether, propylene glycol monobutyl ether; Propylene glycol dialkyl ethers such as propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol dipropyl ether, propylene glycol dibutyl ether; Propylene glycol Monomethyl ether acete Propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass, and more preferably 60 to 120 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the photosensitive composition excluding the solvent.
  • a dry film comprising the above-mentioned non-photosensitive layer and photosensitive layer is prepared. Lamination is performed so that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the substrate.
  • a base material and a laminate in which a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed in this order on the base material can be formed.
  • the photosensitive layer is exposed to a predetermined pattern through a predetermined mask pattern.
  • radiation used for exposure include low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, metal halide lamps, g-ray steppers, i-line steppers and other ultraviolet rays or electron beams, laser beams, and the like.
  • the thickness is selected as appropriate depending on the thickness, the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer, the transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer, etc. For example, in the case of UV irradiation from a high-pressure mercury lamp, when the photosensitive layer thickness is 10-50 ⁇ m, 100-5000 mJ / cm. It is about 2 .
  • the photosensitive layer is exposed by irradiating the non-photosensitive layer with radiation.
  • a support body shows a light-shielding property with respect to actinic light, after removing a support body, actinic light is irradiated.
  • post-exposure baking heat treatment
  • the curing reaction of the (F) component and the (G) component by the generated acid can be promoted.
  • the preferable range varies depending on the composition of the photosensitive composition, the thickness of the photosensitive layer, and the like, but it is usually preferable to heat at 60 to 150 ° C. for about 1 to 60 minutes, and at 1 to 60 at 70 to 100 ° C. It is more preferable to heat for about a minute.
  • the photosensitive layer that has been baked after exposure is developed with an alkaline developer to dissolve and remove the region other than the photocured portion (unexposed portion) of the photosensitive layer.
  • Examples of the developing method in this case include a shower method, a high-pressure spray method, a dipping method, a paddle method, and the like, and a high-pressure spray method is preferable.
  • the non-photosensitive layer has a lower solubility in a developer than the photosensitive layer, and the solubility change in the exposed area is poor. Therefore, a clear resin pattern of the non-photosensitive layer like the photosensitive layer is not formed, or no resin pattern is formed at all.
  • the development conditions are usually 20 to 40 ° C. for about 1 to 10 minutes.
  • the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted, the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and penetrates the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer. A hole is formed.
  • the alkaline developer examples include an alkaline aqueous solution in which an alkaline compound such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia water, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and choline is dissolved in water so as to have a concentration of about 1 to 10% by mass. Is mentioned.
  • An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol or a surfactant can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution.
  • the alkaline developer is preferably tetramethylammonium hydroxide in terms of excellent resolution.
  • a cured film (resist pattern) is obtained by performing a heat treatment in order to develop the insulating film characteristics and improve the resolution.
  • the curing conditions at this time are not particularly limited, but the photosensitive composition can be cured by heating at 50 to 250 ° C. for about 30 minutes to 10 hours depending on the use of the cured product.
  • heating can be performed in two stages in order to sufficiently advance the curing or to prevent deformation of the obtained pattern shape.
  • it can be cured by heating at 50 to 120 ° C. for about 5 minutes to 2 hours in the first stage and further heating at 80 to 200 ° C. for about 10 minutes to 10 hours in the second stage.
  • a general oven, infrared furnace, or the like can be used as a heating facility.
  • the laminated body of the present embodiment is heat-treated after development, whereby the non-photosensitive layer torn as shown in FIG. 4 is fused to the wall surface of the hole to form a via.
  • the non-photosensitive layer is torn in a shape similar to the shape of the hole, the non-photosensitive layer does not necessarily have to be fused to the wall surface of the hole.
  • the method for forming the circuit is not particularly limited, and a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed on the inner layer circuit, and an outer layer circuit is formed on the non-photosensitive layer by a plating method.
  • an oxidizing roughening liquid such as a chromium / sulfuric acid roughening liquid, an alkaline permanganic acid roughening liquid, a sodium fluoride / chromium / sulfuric acid roughening liquid, or a borofluoric acid roughening liquid can be used.
  • an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether and NaOH is first heated as a swelling solution to 80 ° C., and the laminate or multilayer wiring board is immersed for 5 minutes.
  • an aqueous solution of KMnO 4 and NaOH is heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes.
  • KMnO 4 is reduced by immersing in a neutralizing solution, for example, an aqueous hydrochloric acid solution of stannous chloride (SnCl 2 ) at room temperature for 5 minutes.
  • a plating catalyst applying treatment for adhering palladium is performed.
  • the plating catalyst treatment is performed by immersing in a palladium chloride plating catalyst solution.
  • an electroless plating solution to deposit an electroless plating layer (conductor layer) having a thickness of 0.1 to 1.5 ⁇ m on the entire surface of the non-photosensitive layer. If necessary, further electroplating is performed to obtain a necessary thickness.
  • the electroless plating solution used for electroless plating a known electroless plating solution can be used, and there is no particular limitation.
  • electroplating can be performed by a known method and is not particularly limited. These platings are preferably copper platings. Furthermore, unnecessary portions can be removed by etching to form a circuit layer. Furthermore, a multilayer wiring board with many layers can be manufactured by repeating the same process.
  • the roughening treatment can also be performed to remove via smear.
  • an interlayer insulating layer 103 is formed on both surfaces of a base material 101 having a wiring pattern 102 formed on the surface (see FIG. 2A).
  • the interlayer insulating layer 103 can be formed by preparing the above-described dry film in advance and using a laminator to attach the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer of the dry film so that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the printed wiring board. .
  • the photosensitive composition is applied to the substrate to form a photosensitive layer, and then the resin composition is applied onto the photosensitive layer to form a non-photosensitive layer.
  • the interlayer insulating layer 103 may be formed.
  • the interlayer insulating layer 103 is expressed as a single layer for simplification, but is actually divided into a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer.
  • an opening 104 is formed by exposing a region other than a portion that needs to be electrically connected to the outside, developing, and then performing heat treatment (see FIG. 2B). Smear (residue) around the opening 104 is removed by desmear treatment.
  • a seed layer 105 is formed by an electroless plating method (see FIG. 2C). A photosensitive layer of the semi-additive photosensitive element is formed on the seed layer 105, and a predetermined portion is exposed and developed to form a resin pattern 106 (see FIG. 2D).
  • a wiring pattern 107 is formed on the portion of the seed layer 105 where the resin pattern 106 is not formed by electrolytic plating, and the resin pattern 106 is removed using a stripping solution, and then the wiring pattern 107 of the seed layer 105 is formed. Unexposed portions are removed by etching (see FIG. 2E).
  • the multilayer printed wiring board 100A can be manufactured by repeating the above operation and forming the solder resist 108 on the outermost surface (see FIG. 2F).
  • the dry film according to the second embodiment is a dry film including a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, and a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed on a substrate in this order, and the photosensitive layer is exposed to dry By developing the film, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted and the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and a via can be formed at a location where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by the heat treatment after development. Is.
  • the dry film according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer formed in this order on a substrate, and after exposing the photosensitive layer in a predetermined pattern by the above-described method, the non-photosensitive layer And by spraying the photosensitive layer with an aqueous 2.38 mass% tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution for a time corresponding to twice the shortest development time (the shortest time for removing the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer). As shown in FIG. 3, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted and the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken. In the developed dry film, a hole penetrating the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer is formed.
  • the development here can also be performed by a method other than the spray method described above. Moreover, you may heat-process the photosensitive layer exposed before developing a dry film.
  • the post-exposure heat treatment is preferably performed under the same conditions as the post-exposure heat treatment in the first embodiment described above.
  • the developed dry film is heat-treated, so that the torn non-photosensitive layer is fused to the wall surface of the hole as shown in FIG. 4 to form a via.
  • the heat treatment can be performed, for example, at 50 to 250 ° C. for about 30 minutes to 10 hours in one stage. In the first stage, heating is performed at 50 to 120 ° C. for about 5 minutes to 2 hours, and then the second treatment. The heating may be performed in two steps at 80 to 200 ° C. for about 10 minutes to 10 hours.
  • the non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer in the dry film of the present embodiment are not particularly limited as long as they have the functions described above, and examples thereof include the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer described in the first embodiment. It is done. Moreover, a resist pattern and a multilayer printed wiring board can be formed by the above-mentioned method by using the dry film of this embodiment.
  • the photosensitive layer is a positive type, the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer elutes and the non-photosensitive layer on the exposed portion is broken, but vias can be formed at locations where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by the heat treatment after development.
  • Varnish a-II was obtained in the same manner as varnish a-I except that the component (D) of varnish a-I was removed.
  • varnish a-III solid content concentration: about 25 mass%) was obtained using a disperser (Nanomizer, trade name, manufactured by Yoshida Kikai Kogyo Co., Ltd.).
  • F-1 Cresol novolak resin (Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd., trade name: TR4020G)
  • F-2 Cresol novolac resin (Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd., trade name: TR4080G)
  • G-1 1,3,4,6-tetrakis (methoxymethyl) glycoluril (manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name “MX-270”)
  • H-1 Trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: ZX-1542, see formula (3) below)
  • H-2 Trimethylolpropane triacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: TMPTA)
  • H-3 Pentaerythritol triacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: PET-30)
  • I-1 Triarylsulfonium salt (manufactured by San Apro Co., Ltd., trade name: CPI-310B)
  • Solvent methyl ethyl ketone (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
  • Sol-gel silica having an average primary particle size of 15 nm, which is coupled with D′-1: 3-methacryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane
  • the solution of the resin composition used for forming the non-photosensitive layer obtained above becomes uniform in thickness on a polyethylene terephthalate film (product name “Purex A53” manufactured by Teijin DuPont Films Ltd.) (support). And dried for 10 minutes with a hot air convection dryer at 100 to 140 ° C. to form a non-photosensitive layer so that the film thickness after drying was as shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • the solution of the photosensitive composition obtained above is applied onto the non-photosensitive layer so that the thickness is uniform, and dried for 10 minutes in a hot air convection dryer at 90 ° C., and the film thickness after drying
  • the photosensitive layer was formed so as to have the thicknesses shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • a polypropylene film (manufactured by Tamapoly Co., Ltd., product name “NF-15”) (protective layer) was bonded onto the photosensitive layer to obtain dry films.
  • the composition of the produced dry film is shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • Example A1 a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 0.5 ⁇ m) formed using varnish a-I and a photosensitive layer (thickness) formed using varnish b-I on the support. : 10 ⁇ m) and a dry film comprising a protective layer in this order.
  • dry films were prepared using solutions of the corresponding resin compositions.
  • MVLP-500 manufactured by Meiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.
  • the exposed photosensitive layer is then heated at 65 ° C. for 1 minute and then at 75 ° C. for 8 minutes (post-exposure bake), using a 2.38% by weight aqueous tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution to develop the shortest development time (the photosensitive layer).
  • the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer was removed (development process) by spraying for a time corresponding to twice the shortest time for removing the exposed portion).
  • heat treatment was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes. After the heat treatment, the via pattern formed using a metal microscope was observed, and the resolution was evaluated with the minimum via pattern size. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • FIG.3 and FIG.4 respectively.
  • SEM scanning electron microscope
  • the evaluation laminated body produced by the above-mentioned method was exposed.
  • the non-photosensitive layer or the photosensitive layer was exposed using an exposure machine having a high-pressure mercury lamp (trade name “EXM-1201” manufactured by Oak Manufacturing Co., Ltd.) so that the irradiation energy amount was 3000 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the exposed evaluation laminate was heated on a hot plate at 65 ° C. for 2 minutes and then at 95 ° C. for 8 minutes (post exposure bake). Furthermore, it heat-processed for 60 minutes at 180 degreeC with the hot air convection type dryer, and obtained the cured film.
  • an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether: 200 ml / L, sodium hydroxide: 5 g / L was prepared as a swelling liquid, heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes.
  • an aqueous solution of potassium permanganate: 60 g / L and sodium hydroxide: 40 g / L was prepared as a roughening solution, heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 15 minutes.
  • an aqueous solution of a neutralizing solution tin chloride (SnCl 2 ): 30 g / L, hydrogen chloride: 300 ml / L
  • the surface roughness Ra of the surface of the insulating resin (non-photosensitive layer (photosensitive layer when no non-photosensitive layer is present) after the heat treatment) after chemical roughening is measured using a micromap MN5000 model manufactured by Ryoka System Co., Ltd. And measured. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3.
  • an electroless plating catalyst activator Neogant 834 (Atotech Japan Co., Ltd., trade name) containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ) is set to 35 ° C. Heat and immerse for 5 minutes, immerse in plating solution Print Gantt MSK-DK (trade name, manufactured by Atotech Japan Co., Ltd.) for electroless copper plating for 15 minutes at room temperature, and perform copper sulfate electrolytic plating It was. Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m.
  • a region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured insulating resin.
  • the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured.
  • the evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3. In this specification, room temperature means 25 ° C.
  • Examples A1 to A13 had good resolution and high adhesive strength with a peel strength of 0.3 kN / m or more.
  • Comparative Examples A1 to A5 had lower peel strength and Comparative Examples A6 to A15 had inferior resolution as compared with the Examples.
  • a photosensitive layer having a thickness of 10 ⁇ m after drying was formed.
  • a polypropylene film manufactured by Tamapoly Co., Ltd., product name “NF-15”) (protective layer) was bonded onto the photosensitive layer to obtain dry films.
  • Table 5 shows the configuration of the produced dry film.
  • a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 1 ⁇ m) formed using varnish c-I and a photosensitive layer (thickness: formed using varnish d-I) on the support. 10 ⁇ m) and a dry film provided with a protective layer in this order.
  • dry films were prepared using the corresponding resin composition solution and / or the photosensitive composition solution, respectively.
  • MVLP-500 manufactured by Meiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.
  • the exposed photosensitive layer is heated at 75 ° C. for 8 minutes (post-exposure baking), and the shortest development time using the 2.38 mass% tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution (the shortest time at which the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is removed)
  • the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer was removed (development processing) by spraying for a time corresponding to four times the (time).
  • the film was heat-treated at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes in a hot air convection dryer. After the heat treatment, the via pattern formed using a metal microscope was observed.
  • an aqueous solution of a neutralizing solution (tin chloride (SnCl 2 ): 30 g / L, hydrogen chloride: 300 ml / L) was prepared, heated to 40 ° C. and immersed for 5 minutes to reduce potassium permanganate. .
  • HS-202B (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), a catalyst for electroless plating containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ), at room temperature for 10 minutes, washed with water, and electroless copper
  • CUST-201 plating solution (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 15 minutes at room temperature, and further subjected to copper sulfate electrolytic plating. Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m.
  • a region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured insulating resin.
  • the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured.
  • the evaluation results are shown in Table 5. In this specification, room temperature means 25 ° C.
  • the cured film produced by the above method was irradiated with ultraviolet rays.
  • the ultraviolet irradiation was performed using a conveyor type ultraviolet irradiation apparatus with a metal halide lamp (maximum wavelength 350 to 380 nm) at an exposure amount of 3000 mJ / cm 2 .
  • an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether: 200 ml / L, sodium hydroxide: 5 g / L was prepared, heated to 70 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes. Thereafter, it is washed with water, and immersed in a conditioner solution “CLC-601” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 5 minutes at 60 ° C. as a pretreatment for electroless plating, then washed with water, and pre-dip solution “PD- 201 "(trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 2 minutes at room temperature.
  • a conditioner solution “CLC-601” trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.
  • HS-202B (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), a catalyst for electroless plating containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ), at room temperature for 10 minutes, washed with water, and electroless copper
  • CUST-201 plating solution (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 15 minutes at room temperature, and further subjected to copper sulfate electrolytic plating. Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m.
  • a region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured resin film.
  • the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured.
  • the evaluation results are shown in Table 5.
  • room temperature shows 25 degreeC.
  • Example B8 and Comparative Example B7> The solution of the resin composition obtained above was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film (manufactured by Unitika Co., Ltd.) product name “TR-1”) (support) so as to have a uniform thickness, and was heated at 100 to 140 ° C. It dried for 10 minutes with the hot air convection type dryer, and formed the non-photosensitive layer so that the film thickness after drying might be set to 1 micrometer. Next, a photosensitive composition (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Raytec (registered trademark) FZ-2700GA) (d-IV) is laminated on the non-photosensitive layer under the conditions of 100 ° C.
  • a photosensitive composition manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Raytec (registered trademark) FZ-2700GA
  • Example B8 a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 1 ⁇ m) formed using varnish c-I and a photosensitive composition (d-IV) formed on the support were used. It means that a dry film comprising a layer (thickness: 10 ⁇ m) and a protective layer in this order was produced.
  • a photosensitive composition manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Raytec (registered trademark) FZ-2700GA
  • d-IV was used as it was.
  • the resolution, surface roughness and peel strength were evaluated by the methods described above. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6.
  • Examples B1 to B8 have good resolution, and have high peel strength of 0.4 kN / m or more after both chemical roughening and ultraviolet irradiation. showed that.
  • the surface roughness (Ra) of the base resin was as smooth as 0.1 ⁇ m in the ultraviolet irradiation process.
  • Comparative Examples B1 to B3 were inferior in resolution, and the vias could not be opened. Further, Comparative Examples B4 to B7 resulted in poor peel strength.
  • the dry film of the present disclosure is applied as a member used for an interlayer insulating film of a wiring board material or an interlayer insulating film (passivation film) of a semiconductor element or the like.
  • the above-mentioned dry film is suitable for high-density package substrates and the like that are thinned and densified because both the adhesiveness and resolution with the plated copper are good.

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Materials For Photolithography (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a dry film comprising a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, said non-photosensitive layer containing a thermosetting resin.

Description

ドライフィルム、硬化物、積層体及びレジストパターンの形成方法Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern

 本開示は、ドライフィルム、その硬化物、積層体及びレジストパターンの形成方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to a dry film, a cured product thereof, a laminate, and a method for forming a resist pattern.

 近年、電子機器の高性能化(小型化、軽量化及び多機能化)に伴い、LSI、チップ等の半導体部品の高集積化が進み、半導体部品の形態が多ピン化及び小型化へと急速に変化している。また、半導体装置の上に半導体装置を積むパッケージ・オン・パッケージといった実装形態も盛んに行われており、今後、半導体装置の実装密度は一段と高くなると予想される。 In recent years, as electronic devices become more sophisticated (smaller, lighter, and more multifunctional), semiconductor components such as LSIs and chips have become more highly integrated, and the form of semiconductor components has rapidly increased in number and size. Has changed. Further, packaging forms such as a package-on-package in which a semiconductor device is stacked on a semiconductor device are actively performed, and it is expected that the mounting density of the semiconductor device will be further increased in the future.

 プリント配線板は、例えば、コア基板上に複数の配線層が形成されたものであり、コア基板と、各配線層(導体パターン層ともいえる)間に設けられる層間絶縁膜と、最表面に設けられるソルダーレジスト(表面保護膜)とを備えている。 The printed wiring board is, for example, a structure in which a plurality of wiring layers are formed on a core substrate, and is provided on the outermost surface with an interlayer insulating film provided between the core substrate, each wiring layer (also referred to as a conductor pattern layer). Solder resist (surface protective film).

 プリント配線板の層間絶縁膜には、上下の配線層を電気的に接続するためのビア(開口)を設ける必要がある。プリント配線板上に実装されるフリップチップのピン数が増加すれば、そのピン数に対応する数のビアを設ける必要があるが、従来のプリント配線基板は実装密度が低く、また、実装する半導体素子のピン数も数千ピンから一万ピン前後の設計となっているため、小径で狭ピッチなビアを設ける必要がなかった。しかしながら、半導体素子の微細化が進展し、ピン数が数万ピンから数十万ピンに増加するに従って、プリント配線基板の層間絶縁膜に形成するビアも半導体素子のピン数に合わせて狭小化する必要性が高まっている。 It is necessary to provide vias (openings) for electrically connecting the upper and lower wiring layers in the interlayer insulating film of the printed wiring board. If the number of flip chip pins mounted on a printed wiring board increases, it is necessary to provide as many vias as the number of pins. However, conventional printed wiring boards have a low mounting density, and the semiconductor to be mounted Since the number of pins of the device is designed from several thousand pins to around 10,000 pins, it is not necessary to provide vias having a small diameter and a narrow pitch. However, as the miniaturization of semiconductor elements progresses and the number of pins increases from tens of thousands to hundreds of thousands of pins, the vias formed in the interlayer insulating film of the printed wiring board are also narrowed according to the number of pins of the semiconductor elements. There is a growing need.

 層間絶縁膜に、ビア及び配線層を形成する方法としては、例えば、内層回路板(第一の導体パターンを有する基材)上に熱硬化性樹脂材料を用いて絶縁層を形成した後、レーザー加工によってビアを形成し、次いで、絶縁層に対して無電解銅めっき処理をすることで、第二の導体パターンを形成する方法が知られている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。 As a method of forming a via and a wiring layer in an interlayer insulating film, for example, after forming an insulating layer on an inner layer circuit board (base material having a first conductor pattern) using a thermosetting resin material, laser A method of forming a second conductor pattern by forming a via by processing and then performing an electroless copper plating process on an insulating layer is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

特開2002-3705号公報Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2002-3705

 しかしながら、上述した従来の方法、すなわち、レーザーを用いてビアを設ける方法では、それぞれのビアを一つずつ形成しなくてはならず、多数のビアを設ける場合に時間がかかること、ビアの直径に合わせて使用するレーザーを使い分ける必要があること、微細なビアを設けることが困難であること、等の問題がある。 However, in the conventional method described above, that is, in the method of providing vias using a laser, each via must be formed one by one, and it takes time to provide a large number of vias. There are problems that it is necessary to use different lasers according to the situation, and it is difficult to provide fine vias.

 また、絶縁層上に、無電解銅めっきによって導体パターンを形成する場合、絶縁層と、めっき銅との接着力が充分とはいえず、導体パターンが剥離する場合がある。 Also, when the conductor pattern is formed on the insulating layer by electroless copper plating, the adhesive force between the insulating layer and the plated copper is not sufficient, and the conductor pattern may peel off.

 本開示の目的は、上記のような問題点を解決し、めっき銅との接着性に優れ、かつ、解像性に優れるレジストパターンを形成できるドライフィルム及びその硬化物、積層体並びに該ドライフィルムを用いたレジストパターンの形成方法を提供することにある。 An object of the present disclosure is to solve the above-described problems and to form a dry film that can form a resist pattern that has excellent adhesion to plated copper and that has excellent resolution, and a cured product, laminate, and the dry film. It is to provide a method of forming a resist pattern using

 本発明者らは、上記問題点を解決すべく鋭意研究した結果、優れた特性を有するドライフィルムを見出すに至った。すなわち、本開示のドライフィルムは、感光層と非感光層とを備え、非感光層が熱硬化性樹脂を含む。 As a result of intensive studies to solve the above problems, the present inventors have found a dry film having excellent characteristics. That is, the dry film of the present disclosure includes a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, and the non-photosensitive layer includes a thermosetting resin.

 ここで、非感光層とは、例えば、多層配線板を製造する際に絶縁層として用いられるものであり、その表面にめっきすることにより導体パターン(配線層)を形成することができる。本開示のドライフィルムにおける非感光層は、非感光層から形成される絶縁層と、該絶縁層上にめっきを施すことにより形成された導体パターンとの接着性を高め、形成された回路の電気的信頼性を向上させることができる。なお、非感光層は接着補助層ということもできる。
 本開示の非感光層は、現像液等の薬液に対する溶解性が低いため、粗化処理後の表面粗さが小さいことが分かった。また、本発明者らは、本開示のドライフィルムにおける非感光層が、本開示の非感光層と感光層とを混合した一層の絶縁層と比較して、めっき銅との良好な接着性を確保することができることを見出した。
Here, the non-photosensitive layer is used as an insulating layer when, for example, a multilayer wiring board is manufactured, and a conductor pattern (wiring layer) can be formed by plating the surface thereof. In the dry film of the present disclosure, the non-photosensitive layer improves the adhesion between the insulating layer formed from the non-photosensitive layer and the conductor pattern formed by plating on the insulating layer, and the electric circuit of the formed circuit Reliability can be improved. The non-photosensitive layer can also be called an adhesion auxiliary layer.
Since the non-photosensitive layer of the present disclosure has low solubility in a chemical solution such as a developer, it has been found that the surface roughness after the roughening treatment is small. In addition, the present inventors have shown that the non-photosensitive layer in the dry film of the present disclosure has better adhesion to the plated copper than the single insulating layer obtained by mixing the non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer of the present disclosure. It was found that it can be secured.

 更に、本開示のドライフィルムを用いることで、レーザーを用いずにビアを形成できるだけでなく、レーザーを用いた場合と比較して、更に微細な、ビアパターンを形成することができるものとなる。すなわち、上述したドライフィルムを用いることで、非感光層と、感光層とを組み合わせて微細なビアが形成できることを見出した。更に、本開示のドライフィルムを用いて、絶縁層を形成することにより、ビアの残渣発生を抑制でき、また、層間の絶縁信頼性も向上することができるものとなる。 Furthermore, by using the dry film of the present disclosure, not only the via can be formed without using a laser, but also a finer via pattern can be formed as compared with the case where a laser is used. That is, it has been found that by using the above-described dry film, a fine via can be formed by combining the non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, by forming an insulating layer using the dry film of the present disclosure, the generation of via residues can be suppressed, and the insulation reliability between layers can be improved.

 上記非感光層が、(A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、(B-1)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化剤、及び(C)成分:アミド基又はイミド基を有する樹脂を含むと好ましい。 The non-photosensitive layer preferably contains (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-1) component: epoxy resin curing agent, and (C) component: resin having amide group or imide group.

 上記非感光層が、(E)成分:エステル基含有化合物を更に含有すると好ましい。 It is preferable that the non-photosensitive layer further contains (E) component: an ester group-containing compound.

 上記非感光層が、(A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、(B-2)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化促進剤、及び(E)成分:エステル基含有化合物を含むと好ましい。当該非感光層は、紫外線照射処理後の、表面粗さも小さく、かつめっき銅との良好な接着性を確保することができるものとなる。 The non-photosensitive layer preferably contains (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-2) component: epoxy resin curing accelerator, and (E) component: ester group-containing compound. The non-photosensitive layer has a small surface roughness after the ultraviolet irradiation treatment and can ensure good adhesion to the plated copper.

 上記非感光層が、(D)成分:無機フィラーを更に含有すると好ましい。 It is preferable that the non-photosensitive layer further contains (D) component: an inorganic filler.

 上記感光層の厚みが1~50μmであると好ましい。 The thickness of the photosensitive layer is preferably 1 to 50 μm.

 上記非感光層の厚みが10μm以下であると好ましい。 The thickness of the non-photosensitive layer is preferably 10 μm or less.

 上記感光層が(F)成分:フェノール性水酸基を有する樹脂、(G)成分:芳香環、複素環及び脂環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を有し、かつ、メチロール基又はアルコキシアルキル基を有する化合物、(H)成分:アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基、グリシジルオキシ基及び水酸基から選択される一種以上の官能基を2つ以上有する脂肪族化合物、及び(I)成分:光感応性酸発生剤を含有すると好ましい。 The photosensitive layer has (F) component: a resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group, and (G) component: at least one selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring and an alicyclic ring, and a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group. A compound having (H) component: an aliphatic compound having two or more functional groups selected from acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group, glycidyloxy group and hydroxyl group, and (I) component: photo-sensitive acid generation It is preferable to contain an agent.

 上記(F)成分100質量部に対して、前記(H)成分を20~70質量部含有する、請求項8に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to claim 8, comprising 20 to 70 parts by mass of the component (H) with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (F).

 上記感光層が(D’)成分:無機フィラーを更に含有すると好ましい。 It is preferable that the photosensitive layer further contains a component (D ′): an inorganic filler.

 上記(D’)成分が、一次粒径の平均が100nm以下の無機フィラーであると好ましい。 The component (D ′) is preferably an inorganic filler having an average primary particle size of 100 nm or less.

 上記(D’)成分が、シリカであると好ましい。 The component (D ′) is preferably silica.

 上記ドライフィルムは、層間絶縁層の形成に使用できる。 The above dry film can be used for forming an interlayer insulating layer.

 また、本開示は、上記ドライフィルムを用いて得られる硬化物も提供する。 The present disclosure also provides a cured product obtained using the dry film.

 本開示のレジストパターンの形成方法は、上記ドライフィルムを用いて、基材上に感光層と、非感光層とをこの順で形成する工程と、感光層を所定のパターンに露光する工程と、露光された感光層を現像し、加熱処理する工程を含む。 The method for forming a resist pattern of the present disclosure includes a step of forming a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer on a substrate in this order using the dry film, a step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern, And developing the exposed photosensitive layer and subjecting it to a heat treatment.

 上記レジストパターンの形成方法が、露光した上記感光層を現像する前に加熱処理する工程を更に含むと好ましい。 Preferably, the resist pattern forming method further includes a heat treatment step before the exposed photosensitive layer is developed.

 更に、本開示は、感光層と非感光層とを備えるドライフィルムであって、基材上に感光層と非感光層とをこの順で形成し、該感光層を露光し、該ドライフィルムを現像することにより、感光層の未露光部が溶出して未露光部上の非感光層が破れ、現像後の加熱処理によって非感光層が破れた箇所にビアが形成できる、ドライフィルムを提供する。このようなドライフィルムによれば、レーザーを用いずにビアを形成することができ、一度に多数のビアを容易に形成することができる。 Further, the present disclosure is a dry film including a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, wherein a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed in this order on a substrate, the photosensitive layer is exposed, and the dry film is formed. By providing development, a dry film is provided in which an unexposed portion of a photosensitive layer is eluted and a non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and a via can be formed at a location where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by heat treatment after development. . According to such a dry film, vias can be formed without using a laser, and a large number of vias can be easily formed at a time.

 本開示は、基材と、感光層と、熱硬化性樹脂を含む非感光層がこの順で積層された、積層体を提供する。 The present disclosure provides a laminate in which a base material, a photosensitive layer, and a non-photosensitive layer containing a thermosetting resin are laminated in this order.

 本開示のレジストパターンの形成方法は、感光性組成物を基材上に塗布して感光層を形成する工程と、熱硬化性樹脂を含む樹脂組成物を感光層上に塗布して非感光層を形成する工程と、感光層を所定のパターンに露光する工程と、露光された感光層を現像し、加熱処理する工程を含む。 The resist pattern forming method of the present disclosure includes a step of forming a photosensitive layer by applying a photosensitive composition on a substrate, and a non-photosensitive layer by applying a resin composition containing a thermosetting resin on the photosensitive layer. A step of exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern, and a step of developing and heat-treating the exposed photosensitive layer.

 本開示によれば、めっき銅との接着性に優れ、かつ、解像性に優れるレジストパターンを形成することが可能なドライフィルムを提供することができる。また、本開示によれば、該ドライフィルムの硬化物、積層体及び該ドライフィルムを用いたレジストパターンの形成方法を提供することができる。 According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a dry film capable of forming a resist pattern that is excellent in adhesiveness with plated copper and excellent in resolution. Moreover, according to this indication, the formation method of the resist pattern using the hardened | cured material of this dry film, a laminated body, and this dry film can be provided.

本実施形態に係るドライフィルムの模式断面図である。It is a schematic cross section of the dry film which concerns on this embodiment. 本実施形態の多層プリント配線板の製造方法を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the manufacturing method of the multilayer printed wiring board of this embodiment. 本実施形態に係るドライフィルムを現像したもののSEM写真である。It is a SEM photograph of what developed the dry film concerning this embodiment. 本実施形態に係るドライフィルムを現像後に加熱処理をしたもののSEM写真である。It is a SEM photograph of what heat-processed after developing the dry film which concerns on this embodiment. 本実施形態に係るドライフィルムを現像したもののSEM写真である。It is a SEM photograph of what developed the dry film concerning this embodiment. 本実施形態に係るドライフィルムを現像後に加熱処理をしたもののSEM写真である。It is a SEM photograph of what heat-processed after developing the dry film which concerns on this embodiment.

(第一実施形態)
 以下、本開示の第1実施形態について具体的に説明するが、本開示はこれに限定されるものでない。なお、本明細書において、(メタ)アクリレートとは、アクリレート及びそれに対応するメタクリレートの少なくとも一方を意味する。また、(メタ)アクリル化合物等の他の類似表現についても同様である。
(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, although 1st Embodiment of this indication is described concretely, this indication is not limited to this. In the present specification, (meth) acrylate means at least one of acrylate and methacrylate corresponding thereto. The same applies to other similar expressions such as (meth) acrylic compounds.

 本明細書において、「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。本明細書において、「層」との用語は、平面図として観察したときに、全面に形成されている形状の構造に加え、一部に形成されている形状の構造も包含される。更に、本明細書において、「~」を用いて示された数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載された数値をそれぞれ最小値及び最大値として含む範囲を示す。また、本明細書中に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、ある段階の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値は、他の段階の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本明細書中に記載されている数値範囲において、その数値範囲の上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。 In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. It is. In this specification, the term “layer” includes not only a structure having a shape formed on the entire surface but also a structure having a shape formed on a part when observed as a plan view. Further, in this specification, a numerical range indicated by using “to” indicates a range including the numerical values described before and after “to” as the minimum value and the maximum value, respectively. In addition, in the numerical ranges described stepwise in the present specification, the upper limit value or lower limit value of a numerical range of a certain step may be replaced with the upper limit value or lower limit value of the numerical range of another step. Further, in the numerical ranges described in this specification, the upper limit value or the lower limit value of the numerical range may be replaced with the values shown in the examples.

[ドライフィルム]
 本実施形態のドライフィルムを、図1に基づいて説明する。図1は、本実施形態に係るドライフィルム10の模式断面図である。
[Dry film]
The dry film of this embodiment is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a dry film 10 according to this embodiment.

 本実施形態に係るドライフィルム10は、非感光層3と、感光層5とを備えるものである。非感光層3は、後述する樹脂組成物を用いて形成される層であり、感光層5は、後述する感光性組成物を用いて形成される層である。また、上記ドライフィルム10は、非感光層3と支持体1とが接するように支持体1上に形成されていてもよい。すなわち、本実施形態に係るドライフィルム10は、支持体1と、非感光層3と、感光層5と、をこの順で備えてもよい。なお、感光層5上には、感光層5を被覆する保護層7を更に備えていてもよい。 The dry film 10 according to this embodiment includes a non-photosensitive layer 3 and a photosensitive layer 5. The non-photosensitive layer 3 is a layer formed using a resin composition described later, and the photosensitive layer 5 is a layer formed using a photosensitive composition described later. The dry film 10 may be formed on the support 1 so that the non-photosensitive layer 3 and the support 1 are in contact with each other. That is, the dry film 10 according to the present embodiment may include the support 1, the non-photosensitive layer 3, and the photosensitive layer 5 in this order. A protective layer 7 that covers the photosensitive layer 5 may be further provided on the photosensitive layer 5.

 上記支持体1としては、例えば、耐熱性及び耐溶剤性を有する重合体フィルムを用いることができる。上記支持体1(重合体フィルム)としては、例えば、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン等のポリオレフィン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等のポリエステルなどが挙げられる。上記支持体1(重合体フィルム)の厚みは、5~25μmとすることが好ましい。なお、上記重合体フィルムは、一つを支持体1として、他の一つを保護層7として使用してもよい。また、支持体1として、遮光性を示すもの(銅箔等)を用いてもよい。 As the support 1, for example, a polymer film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used. Examples of the support 1 (polymer film) include polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate. The thickness of the support 1 (polymer film) is preferably 5 to 25 μm. One polymer film may be used as the support 1 and the other polymer film as the protective layer 7. Moreover, you may use as the support body 1 what shows light-shielding property (copper foil etc.).

 上記保護層7としては、例えば、耐熱性及び耐溶剤性を有する重合体フィルムを用いることができる。上記保護層7(重合体フィルム)としては、例えば、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン等のポリオレフィン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート等のポリエステルなどが挙げられる。また、保護層7として、遮光性を示すもの(銅箔等)を用いてもよい。 As the protective layer 7, for example, a polymer film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used. Examples of the protective layer 7 (polymer film) include polyolefins such as polypropylene and polyethylene, and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate. Moreover, you may use as the protective layer 7 what shows light-shielding property (copper foil etc.).

 上記非感光層3と感光層5は、それぞれ樹脂組成物及び感光性組成物を支持体又は保護層上に塗布することにより形成することができる。塗布方法としては、例えば、ディッピング法、スプレー法、バーコート法、ロールコート法、スピンコート法等が挙げられる。具体的には例えば、以下に示す方法により本実施形態のドライフィルムを得ることができる。
 まず、上記樹脂組成物を用いて、支持体となる重合体フィルム又は銅箔上に塗工及び乾燥して非感光層3を形成する。次に、非感光層3上に感光性組成物を塗工及び乾燥して感光層5を形成することにより、本実施形態のドライフィルムが得られる。なお、支持体1上に非感光層3を形成したものと、保護層7上に感光層5を形成したものとを貼り合わせて、本実施形態のドライフィルムを得てもよい。
The non-photosensitive layer 3 and the photosensitive layer 5 can be formed by applying a resin composition and a photosensitive composition on a support or a protective layer, respectively. Examples of the coating method include a dipping method, a spray method, a bar coating method, a roll coating method, and a spin coating method. Specifically, for example, the dry film of this embodiment can be obtained by the following method.
First, the non-photosensitive layer 3 is formed by coating and drying on a polymer film or copper foil serving as a support using the resin composition. Next, the photosensitive composition is applied on the non-photosensitive layer 3 and dried to form the photosensitive layer 5, whereby the dry film of this embodiment is obtained. In addition, the dry film of this embodiment may be obtained by bonding the non-photosensitive layer 3 formed on the support 1 and the protective layer 7 formed with the photosensitive layer 5 together.

 非感光層3の厚みは、10μm以下であってもよく、0.1~10μmであってもよく、0.1~5μmであってもよく、0.2~1.5μmであってもよく、0.3~1μmであってもよい。非感光層3の厚みを10μm以下とすることで、アルカリ水溶液に対する現像性が向上する、又は非感光層3が活性光線を吸収することによる、感光層5の感度低下を抑制できるため、解像性が向上する。非感光層3の厚みを0.1μm以上であることで、作業性が向上する。 The thickness of the non-photosensitive layer 3 may be 10 μm or less, 0.1 to 10 μm, 0.1 to 5 μm, or 0.2 to 1.5 μm. 0.3 to 1 μm. By reducing the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer 3 to 10 μm or less, the developability with respect to the alkaline aqueous solution is improved, or the sensitivity reduction of the photosensitive layer 5 due to the non-photosensitive layer 3 absorbing actinic rays can be suppressed. Improves. When the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer 3 is 0.1 μm or more, workability is improved.

 非感光層3の透過率は、80%以上であってもよく、85%以上であってもよく、90%以上であってもよい。非感光層3の透過率が80%以上であることで、感光層5の感度低下を充分に抑制できるため、解像性が向上する。上限値に特に制限はないが、100%未満であってもよい。透過率は、公知の方法を用いて測定することができる。 The transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer 3 may be 80% or more, 85% or more, or 90% or more. Since the transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer 3 is 80% or more, a decrease in sensitivity of the photosensitive layer 5 can be sufficiently suppressed, so that the resolution is improved. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but may be less than 100%. The transmittance can be measured using a known method.

 感光層5の厚みは用途によって、好ましい範囲は変動するが、感光層5の厚みが1~50μmであることが好ましく、5~40μmであることがより好ましく、10~30μmであることが更に好ましい。感光層5の厚みを、上述した範囲とすることで、解像性に更に優れる傾向がある。 The preferable range of the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 varies depending on the application, but the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 is preferably 1 to 50 μm, more preferably 5 to 40 μm, and still more preferably 10 to 30 μm. . By setting the thickness of the photosensitive layer 5 in the above-described range, the resolution tends to be further improved.

[非感光層を形成するために用いる樹脂組成物]
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物は、感光性を有さず、非感光層を形成するために用いられるものである。本実施形態の樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂を含む。熱硬化性樹脂としては、熱により架橋反応を起こす反応性化合物からなる成分であれば特に限定されることはなく、例えば、エポキシ樹脂、シアネートエステル樹脂、マレイミド樹脂、アリルナジイミド樹脂、フェノール樹脂、ユリア樹脂、メラミン樹脂、アルキド樹脂、アクリル樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、レゾルシノールホルムアルデヒド樹脂、キシレン樹脂、フラン樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、ケトン樹脂、トリアリルシアヌレート樹脂、ポリイソシアネート樹脂、トリス(2-ヒドロキシエチル)イソシアヌラートを含有する樹脂、トリアリルトリメリタートを含有する樹脂、シクロペンタジエンから合成された熱硬化性樹脂、芳香族ジシアナミドの三量化による熱硬化性樹脂等が挙げられる。樹脂組成物は、熱硬化性樹脂の硬化剤を含んでいてもよい。
[Resin composition used to form non-photosensitive layer]
The resin composition of the present embodiment does not have photosensitivity and is used for forming a non-photosensitive layer. The resin composition of this embodiment contains a thermosetting resin. The thermosetting resin is not particularly limited as long as it is a component composed of a reactive compound that causes a crosslinking reaction by heat. For example, epoxy resin, cyanate ester resin, maleimide resin, allyl nadiimide resin, phenol resin, Urea resin, melamine resin, alkyd resin, acrylic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, diallyl phthalate resin, silicone resin, resorcinol formaldehyde resin, xylene resin, furan resin, polyurethane resin, ketone resin, triallyl cyanurate resin, polyisocyanate resin, Examples include resins containing tris (2-hydroxyethyl) isocyanurate, resins containing triallyl trimellitate, thermosetting resins synthesized from cyclopentadiene, thermosetting resins by trimerization of aromatic dicyanamide, etc. It is. The resin composition may contain a curing agent for a thermosetting resin.

 本実施形態の樹脂組成物は(A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、(B-1)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化剤、並びに(C)成分:アミド基又はイミド基を有する樹脂を含有してもよい。また、本実施形態の樹脂層を形成するために用いられる樹脂組成物は(A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、(B-2)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化促進剤、及び(E)成分:エステル基含有化合物を含有してもよい。なお、本明細書において、これらの成分は、単に(A)成分、(B-1)成分、(B-2)成分、(C)成分、(E)成分等と称することがある。なお、本実施形態の樹脂層は、めっき工程を備える形成方法において、好適に用いることができる。 The resin composition of this embodiment may contain (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-1) component: epoxy resin curing agent, and (C) component: resin having amide group or imide group. In addition, the resin composition used to form the resin layer of the present embodiment includes (A) component: epoxy resin, (B-2) component: epoxy resin curing accelerator, and (E) component: ester group-containing compound. It may contain. In the present specification, these components may be simply referred to as (A) component, (B-1) component, (B-2) component, (C) component, (E) component and the like. In addition, the resin layer of this embodiment can be used suitably in the formation method provided with a plating process.

<(A)成分>
 エポキシ樹脂としては、好ましい化合物は用途によって変動するが、多官能エポキシ樹脂であることが好ましい。好ましいエポキシ樹脂の具体例としては、クレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ナフトールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールS型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールT型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールZ型エポキシ樹脂、テトラブロモビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビフェニル型エポキシ樹脂、ビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂、テトラメチルビフェニル型エポキシ樹脂、トリフェニル型エポキシ樹脂、テトラフェニル型エポキシ樹脂、ナフトールアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂、ナフタレンジオールアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂、フルオレン型エポキシ樹脂、ジシクロペンタジエン骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、ブタンジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、ペンタジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、ヘキサンジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、ヘプタンジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、オクタンジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂、脂環式エポキシ樹脂等が挙げられる。中でも、ビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂又はヘキサンジオール由来の骨格を有するエポキシ樹脂であることがより好ましい。商業的に入手可能なものとしては、例えば、ビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂(日本化薬株式会社製、商品名:NC-3000)等が挙げられる。これらのエポキシ樹脂は、絶縁信頼性及び耐熱性をより向上させる観点から、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
<(A) component>
As an epoxy resin, although a preferable compound changes with uses, it is preferable that it is a polyfunctional epoxy resin. Specific examples of preferable epoxy resins include cresol novolak type epoxy resins, phenol novolak type epoxy resins, naphthol novolak type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, bisphenol S type epoxy resins, bisphenol T type epoxy resins, bisphenol Z type epoxy resins. , Tetrabromobisphenol A type epoxy resin, biphenyl type epoxy resin, biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resin, tetramethylbiphenyl type epoxy resin, triphenyl type epoxy resin, tetraphenyl type epoxy resin, naphthol aralkyl type epoxy resin, naphthalenediol aralkyl type epoxy Resin, fluorene type epoxy resin, epoxy resin having dicyclopentadiene skeleton, epoxy having skeleton derived from butanediol Resin, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from pentadiol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from hexanediol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from heptanediol, epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from octanediol, alicyclic epoxy resin, etc. It is done. Among these, a biphenyl aralkyl epoxy resin or an epoxy resin having a skeleton derived from hexanediol is more preferable. Examples of commercially available products include biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resins (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: NC-3000). These epoxy resins may be used in combination of two or more from the viewpoint of further improving the insulation reliability and heat resistance.

 (A)成分の含有量は、非感光層を形成するために用いる樹脂組成物の固形分全量100質量部に対して、20~90質量部であることが好ましく、30~80質量部であることがより好ましい。なお、本明細書において、固形分とは、水分、及び後述する溶剤等の揮発性物質以外の組成物中の成分を指す。すなわち、固形分は、25℃付近の室温で液状、水飴状及びワックス状のものも含み、必ずしも固体であることを意味するものではない。 The content of the component (A) is preferably 20 to 90 parts by weight, and preferably 30 to 80 parts by weight with respect to 100 parts by weight of the total solid content of the resin composition used for forming the non-photosensitive layer. It is more preferable. In addition, in this specification, solid content refers to the component in compositions other than volatile substances, such as a water | moisture content and the solvent mentioned later. That is, the solid content includes liquid, water tank-like and wax-like substances at room temperature around 25 ° C., and does not necessarily mean solid.

<(B-1)成分>
 エポキシ樹脂硬化剤としては、好ましい化合物は用途によって変動するが、例えば、フェノール樹脂類、酸無水物類、アミン類、ヒドラジット類等が挙げられる。フェノール樹脂類としては、クレゾールノボラック型フェノール樹脂等のノボラック型フェノール樹脂、レゾール型フェノール樹脂などを用いることができる。酸無水物類としては、無水フタル酸、ベンゾフェノンテトラカルボン酸二無水物、無水メチルハイミック酸等を用いることができる。アミン類としては、ジシアンジアミド、ジアミノジフェニルメタン、グアニル尿素等を用いることができる。
<(B-1) component>
As an epoxy resin hardening | curing agent, although a preferable compound changes with uses, for example, phenol resins, acid anhydrides, amines, hydragits, etc. are mentioned. As the phenol resin, a novolac type phenol resin such as a cresol novolac type phenol resin, a resol type phenol resin, or the like can be used. As the acid anhydrides, phthalic anhydride, benzophenone tetracarboxylic dianhydride, methyl hymic anhydride and the like can be used. As the amines, dicyandiamide, diaminodiphenylmethane, guanylurea and the like can be used.

 (B-1)成分の含有量は、(A)成分のエポキシ基に対して0.5~1.5当量であることが好ましい。エポキシ樹脂硬化剤の含有量が、(A)成分のエポキシ基に対して0.5~1.5当量であると、Tg(ガラス転移温度)及び絶縁性の低下をも抑制することができる。 The content of component (B-1) is preferably 0.5 to 1.5 equivalents relative to the epoxy group of component (A). When the content of the epoxy resin curing agent is 0.5 to 1.5 equivalents relative to the epoxy group of the component (A), it is possible to suppress a decrease in Tg (glass transition temperature) and insulation.

<(B-2)成分>
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物に用いることができる(B-2)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化促進剤として、好ましい化合物は用途によって変動するが、(A)成分の硬化に用いられる一般的な硬化促進剤を使用することができる。エポキシ樹脂硬化促進剤の具体例としては、2-メチルイミダゾール、2-エチル-4-メチルイミダゾール、1-ベンジル-2-メチルイミダゾール、2-ヘプタデシルイミダゾール、2-ウンデシルイミダゾール、1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテート等のイミダゾール系化合物;トリフェニルホスフィン、トリブチルホスフィン等の有機ホスフィン系化合物;トリメチルホスファイト、トリエチルホスファイト等の有機ホスファイト系化合物;エチルトリフェニルホスホニウムブロミド、テトラフェニルホスホニウムテトラフェニルボレート等のホスホニウム塩化合物;トリエチルアミン、トリブチルアミン等のトリアルキルアミン;4-ジメチルアミノピリジン、ベンジルジメチルアミン、2,4,6-トリス(ジメチルアミノメチル)フェノール、1,8-ジアザビシクロ(5.4.0)-ウンデセン-7(以下、「DBU」と略称する)等のアミン系化合物、及びDBUとテレフタル酸又は2,6-ナフタレンジカルボン酸等との塩;テトラエチルアンモニウムクロリド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムクロリド、テトラブチルアンモニウムクロリド、テトラブチルアンモニウムブロミド、テトラヘキシルアンモニウムブロミド、ベンジルトリメチルアンモニウムクロリド等の第4級アンモニウム塩化合物などを挙げることができる。これらは一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
<(B-2) component>
Component (B-2) that can be used in the resin composition of the present embodiment: As an epoxy resin curing accelerator, a preferred compound varies depending on the use, but a general curing accelerator used for curing component (A) Can be used. Specific examples of the epoxy resin curing accelerator include 2-methylimidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methylimidazole, 1-benzyl-2-methylimidazole, 2-heptadecylimidazole, 2-undecylimidazole, 1-cyanoethyl- Imidazole compounds such as 2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate; Organic phosphite compounds such as triphenylphosphine and tributylphosphine; Organic phosphite compounds such as trimethylphosphite and triethylphosphite; Ethyltriphenylphosphonium bromide and tetraphenyl Phosphonium salt compounds such as phosphonium tetraphenylborate; Trialkylamines such as triethylamine and tributylamine; 4-dimethylaminopyridine, benzyldimethylamine, 2,4,6-to Amine compounds such as bis (dimethylaminomethyl) phenol, 1,8-diazabicyclo (5.4.0) -undecene-7 (hereinafter abbreviated as “DBU”), and DBU and terephthalic acid or 2,6- Salts with naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, etc .; quaternary ammonium salt compounds such as tetraethylammonium chloride, tetrapropylammonium chloride, tetrabutylammonium chloride, tetrabutylammonium bromide, tetrahexylammonium bromide, benzyltrimethylammonium chloride, etc. . These may be used individually by 1 type, and may be used in combination of 2 or more types.

 また、(B-2)成分の含有量は、(A)成分100質量部に対して、0.02~1.5質量部であることが好ましく、0.8~1.3質量部であることがより好ましい。0.02質量部以上であると(A)成分の硬化が充分となって、耐熱性を維持できる傾向があり、一方、1.5質量部以下であると樹脂組成物の保存安定性、Bステージ化した樹脂組成物の取り扱い性が良好となる。 The content of the component (B-2) is preferably 0.02 to 1.5 parts by mass, and 0.8 to 1.3 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (A). It is more preferable. If the amount is 0.02 parts by mass or more, the component (A) tends to be sufficiently cured and heat resistance can be maintained. On the other hand, if the amount is 1.5 parts by mass or less, the storage stability of the resin composition, B The handleability of the staged resin composition is improved.

<(C)成分>
 アミド基又はイミド基を有する樹脂としては、例えば、ポリアミド、ポリアミドイミド、ポリイミド等が挙げられる。これらの製造に使用できるジアミンとしては、芳香族ジアミン及び脂肪族ジアミンが挙げられる。(C)成分は、耐熱樹脂ともいえる。
<(C) component>
Examples of the resin having an amide group or an imide group include polyamide, polyamideimide, and polyimide. Examples of diamines that can be used in these production include aromatic diamines and aliphatic diamines. The component (C) can be said to be a heat resistant resin.

 芳香族ジアミンの具体例としては、ジアミノベンゼン、ジアミノトルエン、ジアミノフェノール、ジアミノジメチルベンゼン、ジアミノメシチレン、ジアミノニトロベンゼン、ジアミノジアゾベンゼン、ジアミノナフタレン、ジアミノビフェニル、ジアミノジメトキシビフェニル、ジアミノジフェニルエーテル、ジアミノジメチルジフェニルエーテル、メチレンジアミン、メチレンビス(ジメチルアニリン)、メチレンビス(メトキシアニリン)、メチレンビス(ジメトキシアニリン)、メチレンビス(エチルアニリン)、メチレンビス(ジエチルアニリン)、メチレンビス(エトキシアニリン)、メチレンビス(ジエトキシアニリン)、イソプロピリデンジアニリン、ジアミノベンゾフェノン、ジアミノジメチルベンゾフェノン、ジアミノアントラキノン、ジアミノジフェニルチオエーテル、ジアミノジメチルジフェニルチオエーテル、ジアミノジフェニルスルホン、ジアミノジフェニルスルホキシド、ジアミノフルオレン等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of aromatic diamines include diaminobenzene, diaminotoluene, diaminophenol, diaminodimethylbenzene, diaminomesitylene, diaminonitrobenzene, diaminodiazobenzene, diaminonaphthalene, diaminobiphenyl, diaminodimethoxybiphenyl, diaminodiphenyl ether, diaminodimethyldiphenyl ether, methylene Diamine, methylenebis (dimethylaniline), methylenebis (methoxyaniline), methylenebis (dimethoxyaniline), methylenebis (ethylaniline), methylenebis (diethylaniline), methylenebis (ethoxyaniline), methylenebis (diethoxyaniline), isopropylidenedianiline, Diaminobenzophenone, diaminodimethylbenzophenone, diamy Anthraquinone, diamino diphenyl thioether, diaminodiphenyl dimethyl diphenyl thioether, diaminodiphenyl sulfone, diaminodiphenyl sulfoxide, diaminofluorene and the like.

 脂肪族ジアミンの具体例としては、エチレンジアミン、プロパンジアミン、ヒドロキシプロパンジアミン、ブタンジアミン、ヘプタンジアミン、ヘキサンジアミン、ジアミノジエチルアミン、ジアミノプロピルアミン、シクロペンタンジアミン、シクロヘキサンジアミン、アザペンタンジアミン、トリアザウンデカジアミン等が挙げられる。これらの芳香族ジアミン及び脂肪族ジアミンは、一種のみを用いてもよく、二種以上を混合して用いてもよい。 Specific examples of the aliphatic diamine include ethylenediamine, propanediamine, hydroxypropanediamine, butanediamine, heptanediamine, hexanediamine, diaminodiethylamine, diaminopropylamine, cyclopentanediamine, cyclohexanediamine, azapentanediamine, and triazaundecadiamine. Etc. These aromatic diamines and aliphatic diamines may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 アミド基又はイミド基を有する樹脂の製造に使用するジカルボン酸としては、芳香族ジカルボン酸、脂肪族ジカルボン酸、両末端にカルボキシル基を有するオリゴマー等が挙げられる。 Examples of the dicarboxylic acid used for the production of a resin having an amide group or an imide group include aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, and oligomers having carboxyl groups at both ends.

 芳香族ジカルボン酸の具体例としては、フタル酸、イソフタル酸、テレフタル酸、ビフェニルジカルボン酸、メチレン二安息香酸、チオ二安息香酸、カルボニル二安息香酸、スルホニル二安息香酸、ナフタレンジカルボン酸、ヒドロキシイソフタル酸、ヒドロキシフタル酸、ヒドロキシテレフタル酸、ジヒドロキシイソフタル酸、ジヒドロキシテレフタル酸等が挙げられる。これらの芳香族ジカルボン酸は、一種のみを用いてもよく、二種以上を混合して用いてもよい。 Specific examples of the aromatic dicarboxylic acid include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, biphenyldicarboxylic acid, methylene dibenzoic acid, thiodibenzoic acid, carbonyl dibenzoic acid, sulfonyl dibenzoic acid, naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, hydroxyisophthalic acid , Hydroxyphthalic acid, hydroxyterephthalic acid, dihydroxyisophthalic acid, dihydroxyterephthalic acid and the like. These aromatic dicarboxylic acids may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 脂肪族ジカルボン酸の具体例としては、シュウ酸、マロン酸、メチルマロン酸、コハク酸、グルタル酸、アジピン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、りんご酸、酒石酸、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシコハク酸、ジ(メタ)アクリロイルオキシコハク酸、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシりんご酸、(メタ)アクリルアミドコハク酸、(メタ)アクリルアミドりんご酸等が挙げられる。これらの脂肪族ジカルボン酸は、一種のみを用いてもよく、二種以上を混合して用いてもよい。 Specific examples of the aliphatic dicarboxylic acid include oxalic acid, malonic acid, methylmalonic acid, succinic acid, glutaric acid, adipic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, malic acid, tartaric acid, (meth) acryloyloxysuccinic acid, di ( Examples include (meth) acryloyloxysuccinic acid, (meth) acryloyloxymalic acid, (meth) acrylamide succinic acid, (meth) acrylamide malic acid, and the like. These aliphatic dicarboxylic acids may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 両末端にカルボキシル基を有するオリゴマーとしては、数平均分子量200~10000、好ましくは数平均分子量500~5000のオリゴマーが挙げられる。その具体例としては、両末端にカルボキシル基を持ったポリブタジエン、ブタジエン-アクリロニトリル共重合体、スチレン-ブタジエン共重合体、ポリイソプレン、エチレンプロピレン共重合体、ポリエーテル、ポリエステル、ポリカーボネート、ポリアクリレート、ポリメタクリレート、ポリウレタン、シリコーンゴム等が挙げられる。これら芳香族ジカルボン酸、脂肪族ジカルボン酸及び両末端にカルボキシル基を有するオリゴマーは、一種のみを用いてもよく、二種以上を混合してもよい。「数平均分子量(Mn)」、及び後述する「重量平均分子量(Mw)」は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)法に従って標準ポリスチレンによる検量線を用いて測定した値を指し、より具体的には、GPC測定装置としてポンプ(株式会社日立製作所製、L-6200型)、カラム(TSKgel-G5000HXL及びTSKgel-G2000HXL、いずれも東ソー株式会社製、商品名)及び検出器(株式会社日立製作所製、L-3300RI型)を使用し、溶離液としてテトラヒドロフランを使用し、温度30℃、流量1.0mL/minの条件で測定される。 Examples of the oligomer having a carboxyl group at both ends include oligomers having a number average molecular weight of 200 to 10,000, preferably a number average molecular weight of 500 to 5,000. Specific examples include polybutadiene having carboxyl groups at both ends, butadiene-acrylonitrile copolymer, styrene-butadiene copolymer, polyisoprene, ethylene propylene copolymer, polyether, polyester, polycarbonate, polyacrylate, polyacrylate. Examples include methacrylate, polyurethane, and silicone rubber. These aromatic dicarboxylic acids, aliphatic dicarboxylic acids and oligomers having carboxyl groups at both ends may be used alone or in combination of two or more. “Number average molecular weight (Mn)” and “weight average molecular weight (Mw)” described later refer to values measured using a standard polystyrene calibration curve according to the gel permeation chromatography (GPC) method, and more specifically. Is a pump (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd., L-6200 type), column (TSKgel-G5000HXL and TSKgel-G2000HXL, both manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, trade name) and a detector (manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.) L-3300RI type), tetrahydrofuran is used as an eluent, and measurement is performed at a temperature of 30 ° C. and a flow rate of 1.0 mL / min.

 (C)成分としてポリアミドを含む場合、めっき銅との接着性が更に向上する観点から、ポリアミドとポリブタジエンとの共重合体(「ポリブタジエン変性ポリアミド樹脂」ともいえる)を使用することもできる。このようなポリブタジエン変性ポリアミド樹脂としては、ジアミンとフェノール性水酸基を有するジカルボン酸と両末端にカルボキシル基を有するポリブタジエンとを重縮合して得られるフェノール性水酸基含有ポリブタジエン変性ポリアミドが挙げられる。フェノール性水酸基含有ポリブタジエン変性ポリアミドは、例えば、ジアミンとフェノール性水酸基含有のジカルボン酸と両末端にカルボキシル基を有するポリブタジエンとを、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)等の有機溶媒中で、触媒として亜リン酸エステル及びピリジン誘導体の存在下でカルボキシル基とアミノ基とを重縮合させることで得ることができる。また、ジアミンとフェノール性水酸基を有するジカルボン酸と両末端にカルボキシル基を有するポリブタジエンとに加えて、フェノール性水酸基を有さないジカルボン酸を添加してもよい。このようなフェノール性水酸基含有ポリブタジエン変性ポリアミド樹脂の商業的に入手可能なものとしては、日本化薬株式会社製のBPAM-155等が挙げられる。 When a polyamide is included as the component (C), a copolymer of polyamide and polybutadiene (also referred to as “polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin”) can be used from the viewpoint of further improving the adhesion to the plated copper. Examples of such a polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin include a phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide obtained by polycondensation of a diamine, a dicarboxylic acid having a phenolic hydroxyl group, and a polybutadiene having a carboxyl group at both ends. A phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide is prepared by, for example, catalyzing a diamine, a phenolic hydroxyl group-containing dicarboxylic acid, and a polybutadiene having carboxyl groups at both ends in an organic solvent such as N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP). Can be obtained by polycondensation of a carboxyl group and an amino group in the presence of a phosphite ester and a pyridine derivative. In addition to diamine, dicarboxylic acid having a phenolic hydroxyl group and polybutadiene having a carboxyl group at both ends, a dicarboxylic acid having no phenolic hydroxyl group may be added. Examples of such a commercially available phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polybutadiene-modified polyamide resin include BPAM-155 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.

 (C)成分として含有することができるポリアミドイミドとしては、例えば、無水トリメリット酸又は無水トリメリット酸及びジアミンとの反応物と芳香族ジイソシアネートとの反応による、いわゆるイソシアネート法で合成されるポリアミドイミドが挙げられる。ポリアミドイミドを合成するイソシアネート法の具体例としては、芳香族トリカルボン酸無水物と上記ジアミン化合物とをジアミン化合物過剰存在下で反応させ、次いでジイソシアネートを反応させる方法(例えば、特許2897186号公報に記載の方法)、芳香族ジアミン化合物と無水トリメリット酸とを反応させる方法(例えば、特開平04-182466号公報に記載の方法)が挙げられる。 As the polyamideimide that can be contained as the component (C), for example, polyamideimide synthesized by a so-called isocyanate method by reaction of trimellitic anhydride or a reaction product of trimellitic anhydride and diamine with an aromatic diisocyanate. Is mentioned. As a specific example of the isocyanate method for synthesizing polyamideimide, a method in which an aromatic tricarboxylic acid anhydride and the above diamine compound are reacted in the presence of excess diamine compound and then a diisocyanate is reacted (for example, as described in Japanese Patent No. 2897186). Method) and a method of reacting an aromatic diamine compound and trimellitic anhydride (for example, a method described in JP-A No. 04-182466).

 このようなポリアミドイミド樹脂の商業的に入手可能なものとしては、東洋紡績株式会社製のバイロマックスHR11NN、バイロマックスHR16NN等が挙げられる。 Examples of commercially available polyamide imide resins include Bilomax HR11NN and Bilomax HR16NN manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.

 (C)成分として含有することができるポリイミドとしては、現在工業的に利用されている一般的な合成法で合成したものであってよい。例えば、テトラカルボン酸二無水物と上記ジアミンを原料に等モルで重合させ、ポリイミドの前駆体であるポリアミック酸を得た後、200℃以上の加熱又は触媒を用いて脱水反応及び環化反応を進めることで、ポリイミドを得ることができる。触媒を用いる場合は、アミン系化合物を用いることができ、イミド化によって発生した水を速やかに除去するための脱水剤としてカルボン酸無水物を併用してもよい。なお、上述した(C)成分は、各々単独で用いてもよく、二種類以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 The polyimide that can be contained as the component (C) may be synthesized by a general synthesis method currently used industrially. For example, tetracarboxylic dianhydride and the above diamine are polymerized in equimolar amounts to obtain a polyamic acid that is a polyimide precursor, and then subjected to a dehydration reaction and a cyclization reaction using heating at 200 ° C. or higher or using a catalyst. By proceeding, polyimide can be obtained. When using a catalyst, an amine compound can be used, and a carboxylic acid anhydride may be used in combination as a dehydrating agent for quickly removing water generated by imidization. In addition, (C) component mentioned above may each be used independently, and may be used in combination of 2 or more types.

 (C)成分の含有量は、(A)成分、(B-1)成分及び(C)成分の固形分全量に対して、3~30質量%であることが好ましく、15~25質量%であることがより好ましい。 The content of the component (C) is preferably 3 to 30% by mass, preferably 15 to 25% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the component (A), the component (B-1) and the component (C). More preferably.

<(D)成分>
 上記樹脂組成物は、粗化形状を安定化させ、密着性を向上させる観点で、(D)成分:無機フィラーを含有していてもよい。無機フィラーを含有する場合、パターン形成後に、加熱して得られた硬化膜の熱膨張係数を(D)成分の含有量に応じて低減できる。(D)成分は一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。
<(D) component>
The said resin composition may contain (D) component: an inorganic filler from a viewpoint of stabilizing a roughening shape and improving adhesiveness. When containing an inorganic filler, the thermal expansion coefficient of the cured film obtained by heating after pattern formation can be reduced according to the content of the component (D). (D) component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.

 無機フィラーとしては、例えば、酸化アルミニウム、水酸化アルミニウム、炭酸カルシウム、水酸化カルシウム、硫酸バリウム、炭酸バリウム、酸化マグネシウム、水酸化マグネシウム、シリカ、又はタルク、マイカ等の鉱産物由来の無機フィラーなどが挙げられる。また、シリカとしては、例えば、溶融球状シリカ、溶融粉砕シリカ、煙霧状シリカ、ゾルゲルシリカ等が挙げられる。 Examples of inorganic fillers include aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, calcium carbonate, calcium hydroxide, barium sulfate, barium carbonate, magnesium oxide, magnesium hydroxide, silica, or inorganic fillers derived from mineral products such as talc and mica. Can be mentioned. Examples of the silica include fused spherical silica, fused and ground silica, fumed silica, and sol-gel silica.

 無機フィラーの種類は特に限定されないが、熱膨張係数が5.0×10-6/℃以下であることが好ましく、粒径の観点から、溶融球状シリカ、煙霧状シリカ、ゾルゲルシリカ等のシリカが好ましい。その中では、煙霧状シリカ又はゾルゲルシリカがより好ましい。凝集することなく樹脂中に分散させるために、シランカップリング剤を用いてもよい。 The type of the inorganic filler is not particularly limited, but the thermal expansion coefficient is preferably 5.0 × 10 −6 / ° C. or less. From the viewpoint of particle size, silica such as fused spherical silica, fumed silica, sol-gel silica, and the like is used. preferable. Among them, fumed silica or sol-gel silica is more preferable. In order to disperse in the resin without aggregation, a silane coupling agent may be used.

 それぞれの無機フィラーの粒径を測定する際には、公知の粒度分布計を用いることができる。 When measuring the particle diameter of each inorganic filler, a known particle size distribution meter can be used.

 非感光層を形成するために用いられる樹脂組成物が(D)成分を含む場合、樹脂組成物の固形分全量100質量部に対して、1~40質量部であることが好ましく、1~10質量部であることがより好ましい。 When the resin composition used for forming the non-photosensitive layer contains the component (D), the amount is preferably 1 to 40 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the resin composition. More preferably, it is part by mass.

 また、非感光層(又は、後述する感光層)中に含まれる無機フィラーとしては、一次粒径の平均が100nm以下であることが好ましく、感光性に更に優れる点から、特に50nm以下であることが好ましい。一次粒径の平均が100nm以下であると、解像性がより向上する傾向がある。なお、「一次粒径」は、BET法により実際に測定される粒子の比表面積から換算して得られる値とする。BET法では、吸着質(例えば、窒素等の不活性気体)を低温で固体粒子表面に物理吸着させ、吸着質の分子断面積及び吸着量から比表面積を見積もることができる。樹脂組成物の露光波長領域(例えば、300~450nm)での光散乱を抑える、つまり該露光波長領域での透過率の低下を抑制するという観点で、樹脂組成物中に分散した(D)成分の平均粒子径は80nm以下であることが好ましく、50nm以下であることがより好ましく、30nm以下であることが更に好ましい。樹脂組成物中の(D)成分の平均粒子径の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば、5nm以上とすることができる。透過率の低下を抑制するという観点から、上記無機フィラーは、樹脂組成物中に分散させた際に最大粒子径が1μm以下で分散されていることが好ましく、0.5μm以下に分散されていることがより好ましく、0.1μm以下に分散されていることが更に好ましい。なお、(D)成分の、「平均粒子径」とは、樹脂組成物中に分散した状態での無機フィラーの平均粒子径であり、以下のように測定して得られる値とする。まず、樹脂組成物をメチルエチルケトンで1000倍に希釈(又は溶解)させた後、サブミクロン粒子アナライザ(ベックマン・コールター株式会社製、商品名:N5)を用いて、国際標準規格ISO13321に準拠して、屈折率1.38で、溶剤中に分散した粒子を測定し、粒度分布における積算値50%(体積基準)での粒子径を平均粒子径とする。また、上記粒度分布における積算値99.9%(体積基準)での粒子径を最大粒子径とする。また、支持体上に設けられる非感光層又は樹脂組成物の硬化膜であっても、ドライフィルムを全面露光して感光層の溶出を防いだ上で、上述のように溶剤を用いて1000倍(体積比)に希釈(又は溶解)をした後、上記サブミクロン粒子アナライザを用いて測定できる。 The inorganic filler contained in the non-photosensitive layer (or the photosensitive layer described later) preferably has an average primary particle size of 100 nm or less, and particularly 50 nm or less from the viewpoint of further excellent photosensitivity. Is preferred. When the average primary particle size is 100 nm or less, the resolution tends to be further improved. The “primary particle size” is a value obtained by conversion from the specific surface area of particles actually measured by the BET method. In the BET method, an adsorbate (for example, an inert gas such as nitrogen) is physically adsorbed on the surface of solid particles at a low temperature, and the specific surface area can be estimated from the molecular cross-sectional area and adsorbed amount of the adsorbate. Component (D) dispersed in the resin composition from the viewpoint of suppressing light scattering in the exposure wavelength region (for example, 300 to 450 nm) of the resin composition, that is, suppressing a decrease in transmittance in the exposure wavelength region. The average particle diameter is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and still more preferably 30 nm or less. Although the minimum of the average particle diameter of (D) component in a resin composition is not specifically limited, For example, it can be 5 nm or more. From the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in transmittance, the inorganic filler is preferably dispersed with a maximum particle size of 1 μm or less when dispersed in the resin composition, and is dispersed within 0.5 μm or less. More preferably, it is more preferable to be dispersed to 0.1 μm or less. The “average particle diameter” of the component (D) is the average particle diameter of the inorganic filler in a state dispersed in the resin composition, and is a value obtained by measurement as follows. First, after diluting (or dissolving) the resin composition 1000 times with methyl ethyl ketone, using a submicron particle analyzer (trade name: N5, manufactured by Beckman Coulter Co., Ltd.), in accordance with the international standard ISO 13321, The particles dispersed in the solvent at a refractive index of 1.38 are measured, and the particle size at an integrated value of 50% (volume basis) in the particle size distribution is taken as the average particle size. Further, the particle diameter at the integrated value 99.9% (volume basis) in the particle size distribution is defined as the maximum particle diameter. Further, even for a non-photosensitive layer or a cured film of a resin composition provided on a support, the dry film is exposed to the entire surface to prevent elution of the photosensitive layer, and then 1000 times using a solvent as described above. After dilution (or dissolution) in (volume ratio), measurement can be performed using the submicron particle analyzer.

<(E)成分>
 上記樹脂組成物は、(E)成分:エステル基含有化合物を含有していてもよい。具体的には、1分子中に1個以上のエステル基を含み、水酸基を含まずエポキシ樹脂を硬化させることができるものであり、例えば、脂肪族又は芳香族カルボン酸と脂肪族又は芳香族ヒドロキシ化合物から得られるエステル化合物等が挙げられる。これらのうち、脂肪族カルボン酸、脂肪族ヒドロキシ化合物等で構成されるエステル化合物は、脂肪族鎖を含むことにより有機溶媒への可溶性及びエポキシ樹脂との相溶性を高くすることができる。一方、芳香族カルボン酸、芳香族ヒドロキシ化合物等で構成されるエステル化合物は、芳香族環を有することにより、樹脂組成物の耐熱性を向上させることができる。
<(E) component>
The resin composition may contain (E) component: ester group-containing compound. Specifically, one or more ester groups are contained in one molecule, and an epoxy resin can be cured without containing a hydroxyl group. For example, aliphatic or aromatic carboxylic acid and aliphatic or aromatic hydroxy Examples include ester compounds obtained from the compounds. Among these, an ester compound composed of an aliphatic carboxylic acid, an aliphatic hydroxy compound, or the like can increase the solubility in an organic solvent and the compatibility with an epoxy resin by including an aliphatic chain. On the other hand, an ester compound composed of an aromatic carboxylic acid, an aromatic hydroxy compound, or the like can improve the heat resistance of the resin composition by having an aromatic ring.

 エステル基含有化合物の好適なものとしては、例えば、芳香族カルボン酸、1価フェノール系化合物及び多価フェノール系化合物の混合物を原材料として、当該芳香族カルボン酸と、当該1価フェノール系化合物及び多価フェノール系化合物のフェノール性水酸基との縮合反応にて得られる芳香族エステルが挙げられる。 Suitable examples of the ester group-containing compound include, for example, a mixture of an aromatic carboxylic acid, a monohydric phenol compound, and a polyhydric phenol compound as raw materials, the aromatic carboxylic acid, the monohydric phenol compound, and a polyhydric compound. An aromatic ester obtained by a condensation reaction with a phenolic hydroxyl group of a polyhydric phenol compound is mentioned.

 上記芳香族カルボン酸としては、例えば、ベンゼン、ナフタレン、ビフェニル、ジフェニルプロパン、ジフェニルメタン、ジフェニルエーテル、ジフェニルスルホン、ベンゾフェノン等の芳香環の水素原子の2~4個をカルボキシル基で置換したものが挙げられる。上記1価フェノール系化合物としては、上記した芳香環の水素原子の1個を水酸基で置換したものが挙げられる。上記多価フェノール系化合物としては、上記した芳香環の水素原子の2~4個を水酸基で置換したものが挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include those in which 2 to 4 hydrogen atoms of an aromatic ring such as benzene, naphthalene, biphenyl, diphenylpropane, diphenylmethane, diphenyl ether, diphenylsulfone, and benzophenone are substituted with a carboxyl group. As said monohydric phenol type compound, what substituted one hydrogen atom of the above-mentioned aromatic ring by the hydroxyl group is mentioned. Examples of the polyhydric phenol compound include those in which 2 to 4 hydrogen atoms of the aromatic ring are substituted with a hydroxyl group.

 上記芳香族カルボン酸としては、例えば、フタル酸、イソフタル酸、テレフタル酸、ベンゼントリカルボン酸等が挙げられる。上記1価フェノール系化合物としては、フェノール、各種クレゾール、α-ナフトール、β-ナフトール等が挙げられる。上記多価フェノール系化合物としては、例えば、ハイドロキノン、レゾルシン、カテコール、4,4’-ビフェノール、4,4’-ジヒドロキシジフェニルエーテル、ビスフェノールA、ビスフェノール、ビスフェノールS、ビスフェノールZ、臭素化ビスフェノールA、臭素化ビスフェノールF、臭素化ビスフェノールS、メチル化ビスフェノールS、各種ジヒドロキシナフタレン、各種ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、各種トリヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、各種テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、フロログリシン等が挙げられる。 Examples of the aromatic carboxylic acid include phthalic acid, isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, and benzenetricarboxylic acid. Examples of the monohydric phenol compound include phenol, various cresols, α-naphthol, β-naphthol and the like. Examples of the polyhydric phenol compounds include hydroquinone, resorcin, catechol, 4,4′-biphenol, 4,4′-dihydroxydiphenyl ether, bisphenol A, bisphenol, bisphenol S, bisphenol Z, brominated bisphenol A, and brominated. Examples thereof include bisphenol F, brominated bisphenol S, methylated bisphenol S, various dihydroxynaphthalenes, various dihydroxybenzophenones, various trihydroxybenzophenones, various tetrahydroxybenzophenones, and phloroglycine.

 エステル基含有化合物は、1分子中にエステル基1個以上を有する樹脂であってもよく、市販品としても入手可能である。例えば、DIC株式会社製の「EXB-9460」、「EXB-9460S」、「EXB-9470」、「EXB-9480」、「EXB-9420」、三井化学株式会社製の「BPN80」等が挙げられる。これらの紫外線活性型エステル基含有化合物は、一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。 The ester group-containing compound may be a resin having one or more ester groups in one molecule, and is also available as a commercial product. Examples include “EXB-9460”, “EXB-9460S”, “EXB-9470”, “EXB-9480”, “EXB-9420” manufactured by DIC Corporation, and “BPN80” manufactured by Mitsui Chemicals, Inc. . These ultraviolet active ester group-containing compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.

 エステル基含有化合物を含む場合、エステル基含有化合物の含有量は、(A)成分のエポキシ基1当量に対して0.75~1.25当量であることが好ましい。0.75当量以上であると、支持体と非感光層との粘着性及び硬化性が充分に得られやすく、1.25当量以下であると、充分な硬化性、耐熱性及び耐薬品性が得られやすくなる。 When the ester group-containing compound is contained, the content of the ester group-containing compound is preferably 0.75 to 1.25 equivalents with respect to 1 equivalent of the epoxy group of the component (A). When it is 0.75 equivalent or more, sufficient tackiness and curability between the support and the non-photosensitive layer can be obtained sufficiently, and when it is 1.25 equivalent or less, sufficient curability, heat resistance and chemical resistance are obtained. It becomes easy to obtain.

 上記樹脂組成物は、(A)~(E)成分に、必要に応じ、他の成分を加え、これらを充分に撹拌、混合した後、泡がなくなるまで静置して得られる。なお、樹脂組成物に含有する無機フィラーを均一に分散させることを目的に、ニーダー、ボールミル、ビーズミル、3本ロール、ナノマイザー等の既知の混練、分散方法を用いてもよい。 The above resin composition is obtained by adding other components to the components (A) to (E) as necessary, sufficiently stirring and mixing them, and then standing until there are no bubbles. For the purpose of uniformly dispersing the inorganic filler contained in the resin composition, a known kneading and dispersing method such as a kneader, ball mill, bead mill, three rolls, or nanomizer may be used.

 上記樹脂組成物は、溶剤中で混合して希釈又は分散させてワニスの形態とするのが、作業性の点で好ましい。この溶剤としては、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、キシレン、トルエン、アセトン、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、シクロヘキサノン、エチルエトキシプロピオネート、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド等が挙げられる。これらの溶剤は、一種を単独で用いてもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。この溶剤の樹脂組成物に対する割合は、従来使用している割合としてもよく、非感光層を形成する設備にあわせて、その使用量を調整することができる。一方、分散調製した後、上記の溶剤により、樹脂組成物を更に希釈又は分散し、ワニスを調製することもできる。 It is preferable from the viewpoint of workability that the resin composition is mixed or diluted or dispersed in a solvent to form a varnish. Examples of the solvent include methyl ethyl ketone, xylene, toluene, acetone, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, cyclohexanone, ethyl ethoxypropionate, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide and the like. These solvents may be used singly or in combination of two or more. The ratio of the solvent to the resin composition may be a conventionally used ratio, and the amount used can be adjusted according to the equipment for forming the non-photosensitive layer. On the other hand, after the dispersion preparation, the resin composition can be further diluted or dispersed with the above solvent to prepare a varnish.

[感光性組成物]
 本実施形態の感光層を形成するために用いられる感光性組成物は、光照射されることによって性質が変わる(例えば、硬化する)ものであれば、所望の目的に合わせて用いることができ、ネガ型であってもポジ型であってもよい。なお、「感光性」とは、感光層を露光し、次いで、必要に応じて、露光後の加熱処理をし、次いで、感光性組成物を除去するための現像液を用いて、現像(除去)する場合、樹脂パターンが形成できることをいう。上記感光性組成物は、(F)成分:フェノール性水酸基を有する樹脂、(G’)成分:架橋剤、及び(I)成分:光感応性酸発生剤を含有してもよい。(G’)成分:架橋剤は、熱、酸等の作用により、樹脂との結合あるいは架橋剤同士の結合を形成する化合物である。(G’)成分は、(G)成分:芳香環、複素環及び脂環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を有し、かつ、メチロール基又はアルコキシアルキル基を有する化合物を含んでいてもよく、(H)成分:アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基、グリシジルオキシ基及び水酸基から選択される一種以上の官能基を2つ以上有する脂肪族化合物を含んでいてもよく、(G)成分及び(H)成分の両方を含んでいてもよい。また、本実施形態の感光性組成物は、必要に応じて、(D’)成分:無機フィラー、(J)成分:アミン、(K)成分:有機過酸化物、(L)成分:シランカップリング剤、(M)成分:レベリング剤、(N)成分:増感剤等を含有することもできる。また、(F)成分に加えて、フェノール性低分子化合物を含有することもできる。
[Photosensitive composition]
The photosensitive composition used to form the photosensitive layer of the present embodiment can be used in accordance with a desired purpose as long as its properties change (for example, it cures) when irradiated with light. It may be negative or positive. The term “photosensitive” means that the photosensitive layer is exposed, then subjected to heat treatment after exposure, if necessary, and then developed (removed) using a developer for removing the photosensitive composition. ) Means that a resin pattern can be formed. The photosensitive composition may contain (F) component: a resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group, (G ′) component: a crosslinking agent, and (I) component: a photosensitive acid generator. Component (G ′): A crosslinking agent is a compound that forms a bond with a resin or a bond between crosslinkers by the action of heat, acid, or the like. (G ′) component may contain a compound having (G) component: at least one selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring and an alicyclic ring, and having a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group, Component (H): An aliphatic compound having two or more functional groups of one or more selected from acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group, glycidyloxy group and hydroxyl group may be included. (G) Component and (H) Both components may be included. Moreover, the photosensitive composition of this embodiment is (D ') component: an inorganic filler, (J) component: Amine, (K) component: Organic peroxide, (L) component: Silane cup as needed. A ring agent, (M) component: leveling agent, (N) component: sensitizer can also be contained. Moreover, in addition to (F) component, a phenolic low molecular weight compound can also be contained.

 なお、(D’)成分:無機フィラーとしては、上述の(D)成分と同様のものを用いることができる。感光性組成物が(D’)成分を含有する場合、感光性組成物の固形分全量100質量部に対して、1~70質量部であることが好ましく、3~65質量部であることがより好ましい。 In addition, (D ') component: As an inorganic filler, the thing similar to the above-mentioned (D) component can be used. When the photosensitive composition contains the component (D ′), the amount is preferably 1 to 70 parts by mass and preferably 3 to 65 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition. More preferred.

 本実施形態の感光性組成物に含まれる(D’)成分としては、一次粒径の平均が100nm以下であることが好ましい。また、(D’)の平均粒子径が100nm以下であることが好ましい。これによって、(D’)成分の含有量に応じて、硬化膜の熱膨張係数を低減できる。感光性組成物の露光波長領域(例えば、300~450nm)での光散乱を抑える、つまり該露光波長領域での透過率の低下を抑制するという観点で、感光性組成物中に分散した(D’)成分の平均粒子径は80nm以下であることが好ましく、50nm以下であることがより好ましく、30nm以下であることが更に好ましい。(D’)成分における平均粒子径の下限は特に限定されないが、例えば、5nm以上とすることができる。透過率の低下を抑制するという観点から、上記無機フィラーは、感光性組成物中に分散させた際に最大粒子径が1μm以下で分散されていることが好ましく、0.5μm以下に分散されていることがより好ましく、0.1μm以下に分散されていることが更に好ましい。なお、(D’)成分の、「平均粒子径」及び「最大粒子径」とは、それぞれ感光性組成物中に分散した状態での無機フィラーの、粒度分布における積算値50%(体積基準)での粒子径及び積算値99.9%(体積基準)での粒子径である。また、支持体上に設けられる感光層又は感光性組成物の硬化膜であっても、上述のように溶剤を用いて1000倍(体積比)に希釈(又は溶解)をした後、上記サブミクロン粒子アナライザを用いて測定できる。 As the component (D ′) contained in the photosensitive composition of the present embodiment, the average primary particle size is preferably 100 nm or less. Moreover, it is preferable that the average particle diameter of (D ') is 100 nm or less. Thereby, the thermal expansion coefficient of the cured film can be reduced according to the content of the component (D ′). From the viewpoint of suppressing light scattering in the exposure wavelength region (for example, 300 to 450 nm) of the photosensitive composition, that is, suppressing a decrease in transmittance in the exposure wavelength region, it was dispersed in the photosensitive composition (D The average particle size of the component ') is preferably 80 nm or less, more preferably 50 nm or less, and further preferably 30 nm or less. The lower limit of the average particle diameter in the component (D ′) is not particularly limited, but can be, for example, 5 nm or more. From the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in transmittance, the inorganic filler is preferably dispersed with a maximum particle diameter of 1 μm or less when dispersed in the photosensitive composition, and is dispersed within 0.5 μm or less. More preferably, it is more preferably dispersed to 0.1 μm or less. The “average particle diameter” and “maximum particle diameter” of the component (D ′) are 50% (volume basis) of the integrated value in the particle size distribution of the inorganic filler dispersed in the photosensitive composition, respectively. And the integrated value of 99.9% (volume basis). In addition, even a cured film of a photosensitive layer or a photosensitive composition provided on a support is diluted (or dissolved) 1000 times (volume ratio) with a solvent as described above, and then the submicron. It can be measured using a particle analyzer.

<(F)成分>
 本実施形態の感光性組成物に用いられる(F)成分:フェノール性水酸基を有する樹脂としては、特に限定されないが、アルカリ水溶液に可溶な樹脂であることが好ましく、ノボラック樹脂が特に好ましい。このようなノボラック樹脂はフェノール類とアルデヒド類とを触媒の存在下で、縮合させることにより得られる。
<(F) component>
Component (F) used in the photosensitive composition of the present embodiment: The resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group is not particularly limited, but is preferably a resin that is soluble in an alkaline aqueous solution, and particularly preferably a novolak resin. Such a novolak resin can be obtained by condensing phenols and aldehydes in the presence of a catalyst.

 上記フェノール類としては、例えば、フェノール、o-クレゾール、m-クレゾール、p-クレゾール、o-エチルフェノール、m-エチルフェノール、p-エチルフェノール、o-ブチルフェノール、m-ブチルフェノール、p-ブチルフェノール、2,3-キシレノール、2,4-キシレノール、2,5-キシレノール、2,6-キシレノール、3,4-キシレノール、3,5-キシレノール、2,3,5-トリメチルフェノール、3,4,5-トリメチルフェノール、カテコール、レゾルシノール、ピロガロール、α-ナフトール、β-ナフトール等が挙げられる。 Examples of the phenols include phenol, o-cresol, m-cresol, p-cresol, o-ethylphenol, m-ethylphenol, p-ethylphenol, o-butylphenol, m-butylphenol, p-butylphenol, 2 , 3-xylenol, 2,4-xylenol, 2,5-xylenol, 2,6-xylenol, 3,4-xylenol, 3,5-xylenol, 2,3,5-trimethylphenol, 3,4,5- Examples include trimethylphenol, catechol, resorcinol, pyrogallol, α-naphthol, β-naphthol and the like.

 また、上記アルデヒド類としては、例えば、ホルムアルデヒド、パラホルムアルデヒド、アセトアルデヒド、ベンズアルデヒド等が挙げられる。 In addition, examples of the aldehydes include formaldehyde, paraformaldehyde, acetaldehyde, benzaldehyde, and the like.

 このようなノボラック樹脂の具体例としては、フェノール/ホルムアルデヒド縮合ノボラック樹脂、クレゾール/ホルムアルデヒド縮合ノボラック樹脂、フェノール-ナフトール/ホルムアルデヒド縮合ノボラック樹脂等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of such novolak resins include phenol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, cresol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, phenol-naphthol / formaldehyde condensed novolak resins, and the like.

 また、ノボラック樹脂以外の(F)成分としては、例えば、ポリヒドロキシスチレン及びその共重合体、フェノール-キシリレングリコール縮合樹脂、クレゾール-キシリレングリコール縮合樹脂、フェノール-ジシクロペンタジエン縮合樹脂等が挙げられる。(F)成分は一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。 Examples of the component (F) other than the novolak resin include polyhydroxystyrene and copolymers thereof, phenol-xylylene glycol condensation resin, cresol-xylylene glycol condensation resin, phenol-dicyclopentadiene condensation resin, and the like. It is done. (F) A component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.

 (F)成分としては、得られる絶縁膜の解像性、現像性、熱衝撃性、耐熱性等に更に優れる観点から、重量平均分子量が100000以下であることが好ましく、1000~80000であることがより好ましく、2000~50000であることが更に好ましく、2000~20000であることが特に好ましく、4000~15000であることが極めて好ましい。 As the component (F), the weight average molecular weight is preferably 100,000 or less, and preferably 1,000 to 80,000 from the viewpoint of further improving the resolution, developability, thermal shock resistance, heat resistance, and the like of the obtained insulating film. Is more preferably 2000 to 50000, particularly preferably 2000 to 20000, and most preferably 4000 to 15000.

 (F)成分の含有量は、感光性組成物の固形分全量(ただし、(D’)成分を用いる場合は(D’)成分を除く)100質量部に対して30~90質量部であることが好ましく、40~80質量部であることがより好ましい。(F)成分の含有量がこの範囲であると、得られる感光性組成物を用いて形成された膜はアルカリ水溶液による現像性に更に優れる傾向がある。 The content of the component (F) is 30 to 90 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the photosensitive composition (excluding the component (D ′) when the component (D ′) is used). It is preferably 40 to 80 parts by mass. When the content of the component (F) is within this range, a film formed using the resulting photosensitive composition tends to be more excellent in developability with an alkaline aqueous solution.

<(G)成分>
 本実施形態の感光性組成物は、(G)成分:芳香環、複素環及び脂環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を有し、かつ、メチロール基又はアルコキシアルキル基を有する化合物を含有していてもよい。ここで、芳香環とは、芳香族性を有する炭化水素基(例えば、炭素原子数が6~10の炭化水素基)を意味し、例えば、ベンゼン環及びナフタレン環が挙げられる。複素環とは、窒素原子、酸素原子、硫黄原子等を少なくとも1つ有する環状基(例えば、炭素原子数が3~10の環状基)を意味し、例えば、ピリジン環、イミダゾール環、ピロリジノン環、オキサゾリジノン環、イミダゾリジノン環及びピリミジノン環が挙げられる。また、脂環とは、芳香族性を有しない環状炭化水素基(例えば、炭素原子数が3~10の環状炭化水素基)を意味し、例えば、シクロプロパン環、シクロブタン環、シクロペンタン環及びシクロヘキサン環が挙げられる。アルコキシアルキル基とは、アルキル基が酸素原子を介してアルキル基に結合した基を意味する。また、2つのアルキル基は互いに異なってもよく、例えば、炭素原子数が1~10であるアルキル基である。
<(G) component>
The photosensitive composition of this embodiment contains (G) component: the compound which has at least 1 type chosen from the group which consists of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring, and an alicyclic ring, and has a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group. May be. Here, the aromatic ring means an aromatic hydrocarbon group (for example, a hydrocarbon group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms), and examples thereof include a benzene ring and a naphthalene ring. The heterocyclic ring means a cyclic group having at least one nitrogen atom, oxygen atom, sulfur atom and the like (for example, a cyclic group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), such as a pyridine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrrolidinone ring, Examples include an oxazolidinone ring, an imidazolidinone ring, and a pyrimidinone ring. The alicyclic ring means a cyclic hydrocarbon group having no aromaticity (for example, a cyclic hydrocarbon group having 3 to 10 carbon atoms), such as a cyclopropane ring, a cyclobutane ring, a cyclopentane ring, and A cyclohexane ring is mentioned. An alkoxyalkyl group means a group in which an alkyl group is bonded to an alkyl group through an oxygen atom. The two alkyl groups may be different from each other, for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.

 (G)成分を含有することで、樹脂パターン形成後の感光層を加熱して硬化する際に、(G)成分が(F)成分と反応して橋架け構造を形成し、樹脂パターンの脆弱化及び溶融を防ぐことができる。また、具体的には、フェノール性水酸基を有する化合物(ただし、(F)成分は包含されない)、又はヒドロキシメチルアミノ基若しくはアルコキシメチルアミノ基を有する化合物を好ましいものとして用いることができる。 By containing the component (G), when the photosensitive layer after the resin pattern is formed is heated and cured, the component (G) reacts with the component (F) to form a bridge structure, and the resin pattern is weak. And melting can be prevented. Specifically, a compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group (however, the component (F) is not included) or a compound having a hydroxymethylamino group or an alkoxymethylamino group can be preferably used.

 (G)成分として用いる「フェノール性水酸基を有する化合物」は、メチロール基又はアルコキシメチル基を有することで、架橋剤としてだけでなく、アルカリ水溶液で現像する際の未露光部の溶解速度を増加させ、感度を向上させることができる。該フェノール性水酸基を有する化合物の分子量は、アルカリ水溶液に対する溶解性、感光性、機械特性等のバランスを考慮して、重量平均分子量で94~2000であることが好ましく、108~2000であることがより好ましく、108~1500であることが更に好ましい。なお、分子量の低い化合物について、上述の重量平均分子量の測定方法で測定困難な場合には、他の方法で分子量を測定し、その平均を算出することもできる。 The “compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group” used as the component (G) has a methylol group or an alkoxymethyl group, thereby increasing the dissolution rate of the unexposed area when developing with an alkaline aqueous solution as well as a crosslinking agent. , Sensitivity can be improved. The molecular weight of the compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group is preferably 94 to 2000, and preferably 108 to 2000 in terms of weight average molecular weight in consideration of the balance of solubility in alkali aqueous solution, photosensitivity, mechanical properties, and the like. More preferably, it is 108 to 1500. In addition, about the compound with a low molecular weight, when it is difficult to measure by the above-mentioned measuring method of the weight average molecular weight, the molecular weight can be measured by another method, and the average can be calculated.

 フェノール性水酸基を有する化合物としては、従来公知のものを用いることができるが、下記一般式(1)で表される化合物が、未露光部の溶解促進効果と感光性組成物膜の硬化時の溶融を防止する効果のバランスに優れることから好ましい。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
[一般式(1)中、Zは単結合又は2価の基を示し、R24及びR25はそれぞれ独立に水素原子又は1価の有機基を示し、R26及びR27はそれぞれ独立に1価の有機基を示し、a及びbはそれぞれ独立に1~3の整数を示し、c及びdはそれぞれ独立に0~3の整数を示す。ここで、1価の有機基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基等の炭素原子数が1~10であるアルキル基;ビニル基等の炭素原子数が2~10であるアルケニル基;フェニル基等の炭素原子数が6~30であるアリール基;これら炭化水素基の水素原子の一部又は全部をフッ素原子等のハロゲン原子で置換した基が挙げられる。R24~R27が複数ある場合には、互いに同一でも異なっていてもよい。] As the compound having a phenolic hydroxyl group, conventionally known compounds can be used, but the compound represented by the following general formula (1) is effective in promoting the dissolution of the unexposed area and curing the photosensitive composition film. It is preferable because it has an excellent balance of effects for preventing melting.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
[In General Formula (1), Z represents a single bond or a divalent group, R 24 and R 25 each independently represent a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group, and R 26 and R 27 each independently represent 1 A and b each independently represents an integer of 1 to 3, and c and d each independently represents an integer of 0 to 3. Here, examples of the monovalent organic group include an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, and a propyl group; an alkenyl group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms such as a vinyl group. An aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as a phenyl group; a group in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms of these hydrocarbon groups are substituted with a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom. When there are a plurality of R 24 to R 27 , they may be the same or different. ]

 一般式(1)で表される化合物は、一般式(2)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
The compound represented by the general formula (1) is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (2).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002

 一般式(2)中、Xは単結合又は2価の基を示し、複数のRは、それぞれ独立にアルキル基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキル基)を示す。 In General Formula (2), X 1 represents a single bond or a divalent group, and a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).

 また、上記フェノール性水酸基を有する化合物として、一般式(3)で表される化合物を使用してもよい。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 一般式(3)中、複数のRは、それぞれ独立にアルキル基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキル基)を示す。 Moreover, you may use the compound represented by General formula (3) as a compound which has the said phenolic hydroxyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
In general formula (3), a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).

 一般式(1)において、Zが単結合である化合物は、ビフェノール(ジヒドロキシビフェニル)誘導体である。また、Zで示される2価の基としては、メチレン基、エチレン基、プロピレン基等の炭素原子数が1~10であるアルキレン基、エチリデン基等の炭素数が2~10であるアルキリデン基、フェニレン基等の炭素原子数が6~30であるアリーレン基、これら炭化水素基の水素原子の一部又は全部をフッ素原子等のハロゲン原子で置換した基、スルホニル基、カルボニル基、エーテル結合、スルフィド結合、アミド結合等が挙げられる。これらの中で、Zは下記一般式(4)で表される2価の基であることが好ましい。 In general formula (1), the compound in which Z is a single bond is a biphenol (dihydroxybiphenyl) derivative. Examples of the divalent group represented by Z include an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms such as a methylene group, an ethylene group and a propylene group, an alkylidene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms such as an ethylidene group, Arylene groups having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as phenylene groups, groups in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms of these hydrocarbon groups are substituted with halogen atoms such as fluorine atoms, sulfonyl groups, carbonyl groups, ether bonds, sulfides Examples include a bond and an amide bond. Among these, Z is preferably a divalent group represented by the following general formula (4).

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
[一般式(4)中、Xは、単結合、アルキレン基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキレン基)、アルキリデン基(例えば、炭素原子数が2~10のアルキリデン基)、それらの水素原子の一部又は全部をハロゲン原子で置換した基、スルホニル基、カルボニル基、エーテル結合、スルフィド結合又はアミド結合を示す。R28は、水素原子、水酸基、アルキル基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキル基)又はハロアルキル基を示し、eは1~10の整数を示す。複数のR28及びXは互いに同一でも異なっていてもよい。ここで、ハロアルキル基とは、ハロゲン原子で置換されたアルキル基を意味する。]
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
[In the general formula (4), X 2 represents a single bond, an alkylene group (for example, an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms), an alkylidene group (for example, an alkylidene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms), these Or a sulfonyl group, a carbonyl group, an ether bond, a sulfide bond or an amide bond in which part or all of the hydrogen atoms are substituted with a halogen atom. R 28 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms) or a haloalkyl group, and e represents an integer of 1 to 10. The plurality of R 28 and X 2 may be the same as or different from each other. Here, the haloalkyl group means an alkyl group substituted with a halogen atom. ]

 上記ヒドロキシメチルアミノ基又はアルコキシメチルアミノ基を有する化合物としては、(ポリ)(N-ヒドロキシメチル)メラミン、(ポリ)(N-ヒドロキシメチル)グリコールウリル、(ポリ)(N-ヒドロキシメチル)ベンゾグアナミン、(ポリ)(N-ヒドロキシメチル)尿素等が挙げられる。また、これら化合物のヒドロキシメチルアミノ基の全部又は一部をアルキルエーテル化した含窒素化合物等を用いてもよい。ここで、アルキルエーテルのアルキル基としてはメチル基、エチル基、ブチル基又はこれらを混合したものが挙げられ、一部自己縮合してなるオリゴマー成分を含有していてもよい。具体的には、ヘキサキス(メトキシメチル)メラミン、ヘキサキス(ブトキシメチル)メラミン、テトラキス(メトキシメチル)グリコールウリル、テトラキス(ブトキシメチル)グリコールウリル、テトラキス(メトキシメチル)尿素等が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound having a hydroxymethylamino group or an alkoxymethylamino group include (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) melamine, (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) glycoluril, (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) benzoguanamine, And (poly) (N-hydroxymethyl) urea. Moreover, you may use the nitrogen-containing compound etc. which alkyl-etherified all or one part of the hydroxymethylamino group of these compounds. Here, examples of the alkyl group of the alkyl ether include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, or a mixture thereof, and may contain an oligomer component that is partially self-condensed. Specific examples include hexakis (methoxymethyl) melamine, hexakis (butoxymethyl) melamine, tetrakis (methoxymethyl) glycoluril, tetrakis (butoxymethyl) glycoluril, tetrakis (methoxymethyl) urea and the like.

 上記アルコキシメチルアミノ基を有する化合物としては、具体的には、一般式(5)で表される化合物又は一般式(6)で表される化合物であることが好ましい。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Specifically, the compound having an alkoxymethylamino group is preferably a compound represented by the general formula (5) or a compound represented by the general formula (6).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 一般式(5)中、複数のRは、それぞれ独立にアルキル基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキル基)を示す。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
 一般式(6)中、複数のRは、それぞれ独立にアルキル基(例えば、炭素原子数が1~10のアルキル基)を示す。 In general formula (5), a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
In general formula (6), a plurality of R's each independently represents an alkyl group (for example, an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms).

 (G)成分の含有量は、(F)成分100質量部に対して、5~60質量部であることが好ましく、10~45質量部であることがより好ましく、10~35質量部であることが更に好ましい。(G)成分の含有量が5質量部以上であると、露光部の架橋が十分となるため解像度がより向上し、60質量部以下であると、感光性組成物を所望の支持体上に成膜しやすくなり、解像度がより向上する。 The content of component (G) is preferably 5 to 60 parts by mass, more preferably 10 to 45 parts by mass, and more preferably 10 to 35 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of component (F). More preferably. When the content of the component (G) is 5 parts by mass or more, the exposed part is sufficiently crosslinked, so that the resolution is further improved. When the content is 60 parts by mass or less, the photosensitive composition is placed on a desired support. It becomes easier to form a film, and the resolution is further improved.

<(H)成分>
 本実施形態の感光性組成物は、(H)成分:アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基、グリシジルオキシ基及び水酸基から選択される一種以上の官能基を2つ以上有する脂肪族化合物を含有していてもよい。なお、(H)成分は、異なる2種以上の官能基を1つずつ有してもよく、1種の官能基を2つ以上有してもよい。当該化合物は、上記官能基を3つ以上有する脂肪族化合物であることが好ましい。上記官能基数の上限は、特に制限はないが、例えば、12個である。
<(H) component>
The photosensitive composition of this embodiment contains an aliphatic compound having two or more functional groups selected from component (H): acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group, glycidyloxy group and hydroxyl group. Also good. In addition, (H) component may have 2 or more types of different functional groups one by one, and may have 2 or more of 1 type of functional groups. The compound is preferably an aliphatic compound having three or more functional groups. The upper limit of the number of functional groups is not particularly limited, but is 12 for example.

 基材上に感光層を形成する場合の作業性の観点で、感光性組成物には基材に対する張り付き性(タック性)に優れることも求められる場合がある。充分なタック性を有していない感光性組成物を用いる場合、現像処理によって露光部の感光層が除去されやすく、基材とレジストパターンとの密着性が悪化する傾向がある。感光層が、(H)成分を含有することで、感光性組成物と基材との粘着性、すなわちタック性が向上する傾向がある。更に、アルカリ水溶液で現像する際の露光部の溶解速度を増加させ、解像度を更に向上させることができる。タック性、アルカリ水溶液に対する溶解性の観点から分子量はバランスを考慮して、重量平均分子量で92~2000が好ましく、106~1500がより好ましく、134~1300が更に好ましい。なお、分子量の低い化合物について、上述の重量平均分子量の測定方法で測定困難な場合には、他の方法で分子量を測定し、その平均を算出することもできる。 From the viewpoint of workability when a photosensitive layer is formed on a substrate, the photosensitive composition may be required to have excellent adhesion (tackiness) to the substrate. When using the photosensitive composition which does not have sufficient tackiness, the photosensitive layer of an exposed part is easy to be removed by development processing, and there exists a tendency for the adhesiveness of a base material and a resist pattern to deteriorate. When the photosensitive layer contains the component (H), the adhesiveness between the photosensitive composition and the substrate, that is, the tackiness tends to be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the dissolution rate of the exposed area when developing with an alkaline aqueous solution, and to further improve the resolution. From the viewpoint of tackiness and solubility in an aqueous alkali solution, the molecular weight is preferably 92 to 2000, more preferably 106 to 1500, and still more preferably 134 to 1300 in terms of weight average molecular weight in consideration of balance. In addition, about the compound with a low molecular weight, when it is difficult to measure by the above-mentioned measuring method of the weight average molecular weight, the molecular weight can be measured by another method, and the average can be calculated.

 (H)成分の具体例としては、一般式(7)~(10)で表される化合物が挙げられる。なお、「脂肪族化合物」とは、主骨格が脂肪族骨格であり、芳香環又は芳香族複素環を含まないものをいう。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
[一般式(7)~(10)中、R、R、R16及びR19は、それぞれ水素原子、メチル基、エチル基、水酸基又は一般式(11)で表される基を示し、R21は水酸基、グリシジルオキシ基、アクリロイルオキシ基又はメタクリロイルオキシ基を示し、R、R、R、R、R、R、R、R10、R11、R12、R13、R14、R15、R17、R18及びR20は、それぞれ水酸基、グリシジルオキシ基、アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基、一般式(12)で表される基又は一般式(13)で表される基を示し、R22及びR23はそれぞれ水酸基、グリシジルオキシ基、アクリロイルオキシ基又はメタクリロイルオキシ基を示し、n及びmはそれぞれ1~10の整数である。] Specific examples of the component (H) include compounds represented by general formulas (7) to (10). The “aliphatic compound” refers to a compound in which the main skeleton is an aliphatic skeleton and does not contain an aromatic ring or an aromatic heterocyclic ring.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
[In the general formulas (7) to (10), R 1 , R 5 , R 16 and R 19 each represent a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, an ethyl group, a hydroxyl group or a group represented by the general formula (11); R 21 represents a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 6 , R 7 , R 8 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 , R 12 , R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , R 17 , R 18 and R 20 are each a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group, a methacryloyloxy group, a group represented by the general formula (12), or the general formula (13). a group represented, respectively, R 22 and R 23 represents a hydroxyl group, a glycidyloxy group, acryloyloxy indicates group or methacryloyloxy group, integers der of n and m are each 1 to 10 . ]

 グリシジルオキシ基を有する化合物としては、例えば、エチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、トリプロピレングリコールジグリシジルエーテル、ネオペンチルグリコールジグリシジルエーテル、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジグリシジルエーテル、グリセリンジグリシジルエーテル、ペンタエリスリトールテトラグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールエタントリグリシジルエーテル、トリメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテル、グリセロールプロポキシレートトリグリシジルエーテル、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノールジグリシジルエーテル、ジグリシジル-1,2-シクロヘキサンジカルボキシレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the compound having a glycidyloxy group include ethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, diethylene glycol diglycidyl ether, propylene glycol diglycidyl ether, tripropylene glycol diglycidyl ether, neopentyl glycol diglycidyl ether, and 1,6-hexanediol diglycidyl. Ether, glycerin diglycidyl ether, pentaerythritol tetraglycidyl ether, trimethylolethane triglycidyl ether, trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether, glycerol propoxylate triglycidyl ether, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol diglycidyl ether, diglycidyl-1,2 -Cyclohexane dicarboxylate and the like.

 グリシジルオキシ基を有する化合物の中でも、感度及び解像性に優れる点で、トリメチロールエタントリグリシジルエーテル又はトリメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテルが好ましい。 Among the compounds having a glycidyloxy group, trimethylolethane triglycidyl ether or trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether is preferable in terms of excellent sensitivity and resolution.

 グリシジルオキシ基を有する化合物は、例えば、エポライト40E、エポライト100E、エポライト70P、エポライト200P、エポライト1500NP、エポライト1600、エポライト80MF、エポライト100MF(以上、共栄社化学株式会社製、商品名)、アルキル型エポキシ樹脂ZX-1542(新日鉄住金化学株式会社製、商品名)、デナコールEX-212L、デナコールEX-214L、デナコールEX-216L、デナコールEX-321L及びデナコールEX-850L(以上、ナガセケムテック株式会社製、商品名)として商業的に入手可能である。これらのグリシジルオキシ基を有する化合物は、一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。 The compound having a glycidyloxy group includes, for example, Epolite 40E, Epolite 100E, Epolite 70P, Epolite 200P, Epolite 1500NP, Epolite 1600, Epolite 80MF, Epolite 100MF (trade name, manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), alkyl type epoxy resin ZX-1542 (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name), Denacol EX-212L, Denacol EX-214L, Denacol EX-216L, Denacol EX-321L and Denacol EX-850L Name). These compounds having a glycidyloxy group can be used singly or in combination of two or more.

 アクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物としては、例えば、EO変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、PO変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、EO変性ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラアクリレート、PO変性ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラアクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラアクリレート、EO変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、PO変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、EO変性ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、PO変性ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、EO変性トリメチロールプロパンアクリレート、PO変性トリメチロールプロパンアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンアクリレート、EO変性グリセリントリアクリレート、PO変性グリセリントリアクリレート、グリセリントリアクリレート等が挙げられる。これらのアクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物は、一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。EOはエチレンオキシ基、POはプロピレンオキシ基を表す。 Examples of the compound having an acryloyloxy group include EO-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, PO-modified dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, EO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetraacrylate, PO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetraacrylate, ditrile Methylolpropane tetraacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol triacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, EO-modified trimethylolpropane acrylate, PO modified birds Chi triacrylate, trimethylolpropane acrylate, EO-modified glycerol tri acrylate, PO-modified glycerol triacrylate, glycerin triacrylate. These compounds having an acryloyloxy group can be used singly or in combination of two or more. EO represents an ethyleneoxy group, and PO represents a propyleneoxy group.

 メタクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物としては、例えば、EO変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、PO変性ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート、EO変性ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラメタクリレート、PO変性ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラメタクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラメタクリレート、EO変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、PO変性ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、EO変性ペンタエリスリトールトリメタクリレート、PO変性ペンタエリスリトールトリメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリメタクリレート、EO変性トリメチロールプロパンメタクリレート、PO変性トリメチロールプロパンメタクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンメタクリレート、EO変性グリセリントリメタクリレート、PO変性グリセリントリメタクリレート、グリセリントリメタクリレート等が挙げられる。これらのメタクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物は、一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。EOはエチレンオキシ基、POはプロピレンオキシ基を表す。 Examples of the compound having a methacryloyloxy group include EO-modified dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, PO-modified dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate, EO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetramethacrylate, PO-modified ditrimethylolpropane tetramethacrylate, ditriethyl. Methylolpropane tetramethacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, EO-modified pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, PO-modified pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol trimethacrylate, EO-modified trimethylolpropane Methacrylate, PO-modified trimethylolpropane dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropane dimethacrylate, EO modified glycerol trimethacrylate, PO-modified glycerol trimethacrylate, glycerine trimethacrylate and the like. These compounds having a methacryloyloxy group can be used singly or in combination of two or more. EO represents an ethyleneoxy group, and PO represents a propyleneoxy group.

 水酸基を有する化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール、ペンタエリスリトール、グリセリン等の多価アルコールが挙げられる。これらの水酸基を有する化合物は、一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。 Examples of the compound having a hydroxyl group include polyhydric alcohols such as dipentaerythritol, pentaerythritol, and glycerin. These compounds having a hydroxyl group can be used singly or in combination of two or more.

 (H)成分の官能基としては、グリシジルオキシ基、アクリロイルオキシ基又はメタクリロイルオキシ基が好ましく、グリシジルオキシ基又はアクリロイル基がより好ましく、アクリロイルオキシ基が更に好ましい。また、現像性の観点から、(H)成分は、2つ以上のグリシジルオキシ基を有する脂肪族化合物であることが好ましく、3つ以上のグリシジルオキシ基を有する脂肪族化合物であることがより好ましく、重量平均分子量が1000以下のグリシジルオキシ基を有する脂肪族化合物であることがより好ましい。 The functional group of the component (H) is preferably a glycidyloxy group, an acryloyloxy group or a methacryloyloxy group, more preferably a glycidyloxy group or an acryloyl group, and even more preferably an acryloyloxy group. From the viewpoint of developability, the component (H) is preferably an aliphatic compound having two or more glycidyloxy groups, more preferably an aliphatic compound having three or more glycidyloxy groups. More preferably, the aliphatic compound has a glycidyloxy group having a weight average molecular weight of 1000 or less.

 (H)成分を含有する場合、(H)成分の含有量は、(F)成分100質量部に対して、20~70質量部であることが好ましく、25~65質量部であることがより好ましく、35~55質量部であることが更に好ましい。(H)成分の含有量が20質量部以上であることで、充分なタック性を得ることができ、70質量部以下であることで、感光性組成物を所望の支持体上に成膜しやすくなり、解像度の低下を抑制することができる。 When the component (H) is contained, the content of the component (H) is preferably 20 to 70 parts by mass, more preferably 25 to 65 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (F). Preferably, the amount is 35 to 55 parts by mass. When the content of the component (H) is 20 parts by mass or more, sufficient tackiness can be obtained, and when the content is 70 parts by mass or less, a photosensitive composition is formed on a desired support. It becomes easy and the fall of resolution can be controlled.

<(I)成分>
 本実施形態の感光性組成物は、(I)成分:光感応性酸発生剤を含有していてもよい。(I)成分は、活性光線等の照射によって酸を発生する化合物であり、発生した酸により(G)成分同士が架橋するだけではなく、(F)成分のフェノール性水酸基とも反応し、現像液に対する組成物の溶解性が大幅に低下する。また、発生した酸の触媒作用により(G)成分中のメチロール基同士若しくはアルコキシアルキル基同士、又は(G)成分中のメチロール基若しくはアルコキシアルキル基と(F)成分とが脱アルコールを伴って反応することによってネガ型のパターンを形成することができる。
<(I) component>
The photosensitive composition of this embodiment may contain (I) component: a photosensitive acid generator. The component (I) is a compound that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays and the like, and not only the (G) component is cross-linked by the generated acid, but also reacts with the phenolic hydroxyl group of the (F) component to develop a developer. The solubility of the composition with respect to is greatly reduced. Further, due to the catalytic action of the generated acid, methylol groups or alkoxyalkyl groups in component (G) or methylol groups or alkoxyalkyl groups in component (G) react with (F) component with dealcoholization. By doing so, a negative pattern can be formed.

 (I)成分は、活性光線等の照射によって酸を発生する化合物であれば特に限定されないが、例えば、オニウム塩化合物、ハロゲン含有化合物、ジアゾケトン化合物、スルホン化合物、スルホン酸化合物、スルホンイミド化合物、ジアゾメタン化合物等が挙げられる。以下、その具体例を示す。 The component (I) is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that generates an acid upon irradiation with actinic rays or the like. For example, an onium salt compound, a halogen-containing compound, a diazoketone compound, a sulfone compound, a sulfonic acid compound, a sulfonimide compound, and diazomethane. Compounds and the like. Specific examples are shown below.

 オニウム塩化合物:
 オニウム塩化合物としては、例えば、ヨードニウム塩、スルホニウム塩、ホスホニウム塩、ジアゾニウム塩及びピリジニウム塩が挙げられる。オニウム塩化合物の好ましい具体例としては、ジフェニルヨードニウムトリフルオロメタンスルホネート、ジフェニルヨードニウムp-トルエンスルホネート、ジフェニルヨードニウムヘキサフルオロアンチモネート、ジフェニルヨードニウムヘキサフルオロホスフェート、ジフェニルヨードニウムテトラフルオロボレート等のジアリールヨードニウム塩;トリフェニルスルホニウムトリフルオロメタンスルホネート、トリフェニルスルホニウムp-トルエンスルホネート、トリフェニルスルホニウムヘキサフルオロアンチモネート等のトリアリールスルホニウム塩;4-t-ブチルフェニル-ジフェニルスルホニウムトリフルオロメタンスルホネート;4-t-ブチルフェニル-ジフェニルスルホニウムp-トルエンスルホネート;4,7-ジ-n-ブトキシナフチルテトラヒドロチオフェニウムトリフルオロメタンスルホネートなどが挙げられる。
Onium salt compounds:
Examples of the onium salt compounds include iodonium salts, sulfonium salts, phosphonium salts, diazonium salts, and pyridinium salts. Preferred examples of the onium salt compound include diaryl iodonium salts such as diphenyliodonium trifluoromethanesulfonate, diphenyliodonium p-toluenesulfonate, diphenyliodonium hexafluoroantimonate, diphenyliodonium hexafluorophosphate, and diphenyliodonium tetrafluoroborate; triphenylsulfonium Triarylsulfonium salts such as trifluoromethanesulfonate, triphenylsulfonium p-toluenesulfonate, triphenylsulfonium hexafluoroantimonate; 4-t-butylphenyl-diphenylsulfonium trifluoromethanesulfonate; 4-t-butylphenyl-diphenylsulfonium p- Toluenesulfonate; 4, 7 And di -n- butoxy naphthyl tetrahydrothiophenium trifluoromethanesulfonate, and the like.

 スルホンイミド化合物:
 スルホンイミド化合物の具体例としては、N-(トリフルオロメチルスルホニルオキシ)スクシンイミド、N-(トリフルオロメチルスルホニルオキシ)フタルイミド、N-(トリフルオロメチルスルホニルオキシ)ジフェニルマレイミド、N-(トリフルオロメチルスルホニルオキシ)ビシクロ[2.2.1]ヘプト-5-エン-2,3-ジカルボキシイミド、N-(トリフルオロメチルスルホニルオキシ)ナフチルイミド、N-(p-トルエンスルホニルオキシ)-1,8-ナフタルイミド及びN-(10-カンファースルホニルオキシ)-1,8-ナフタルイミドが挙げられる。
Sulfonimide compounds:
Specific examples of the sulfonimide compound include N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) succinimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) phthalimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) diphenylmaleimide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyl). Oxy) bicyclo [2.2.1] hept-5-ene-2,3-dicarboximide, N- (trifluoromethylsulfonyloxy) naphthylimide, N- (p-toluenesulfonyloxy) -1,8- And naphthalimide and N- (10-camphorsulfonyloxy) -1,8-naphthalimide.

 本実施形態においては、感度及び解像性に優れる点で(I)成分はトリフルオロメタンスルホネート基、ヘキサフルオロアンチモネート基、ヘキサフルオロホスフェート基又はテトラフルオロボレート基を有する化合物が好ましい。また、(I)成分は一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。 In the present embodiment, the component (I) is preferably a compound having a trifluoromethanesulfonate group, a hexafluoroantimonate group, a hexafluorophosphate group or a tetrafluoroborate group in terms of excellent sensitivity and resolution. Moreover, (I) component can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.

 (I)成分を含有する場合、(I)成分の含有量は、本実施形態の感光性組成物の感度、解像度、パターン形状等をより向上させる観点から(F)成分100質量部に対して、0.1~15質量部であることが好ましく、0.3~10質量部であることがより好ましい。 When component (I) is contained, the content of component (I) is based on 100 parts by mass of component (F) from the viewpoint of further improving the sensitivity, resolution, pattern shape, and the like of the photosensitive composition of the present embodiment. 0.1 to 15 parts by mass, and more preferably 0.3 to 10 parts by mass.

<溶剤>
 感光性組成物の取り扱い性を向上させたり、粘度及び保存安定性を調節したりするために、本実施形態の感光性組成物に溶剤を添加してもよい。溶剤は、有機溶剤であることが好ましい。このような有機溶剤としては、特に制限されるものではないが、例えば、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート等のエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類;プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノブチルエーテル等のプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル類;プロピレングリコールジメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジエチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジプロピルエーテル、プロピレングリコールジブチルエーテル等のプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル類;プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート等のプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート類;エチルセロソルブ、ブチルセロソルブ等のセロソルブ類、ブチルカルビトール等のカルビトール類;乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、乳酸n-プロピル、乳酸イソプロピル等の乳酸エステル類;酢酸エチル、酢酸n-プロピル、酢酸イソプロピル、酢酸n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、酢酸n-アミル、酢酸イソアミル、プロピオン酸イソプロピル、プロピオン酸n-ブチル、プロピオン酸イソブチル等の脂肪族カルボン酸エステル類;3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル等の他のエステル類;トルエン、キシレン等の芳香族炭化水素類;2-ブタノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン、4-ヘプタノン、シクロヘキサノン等のケトン類;N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N-メチルアセトアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、N-メチルピロリドン等のアミド類;γ-ブチロラクトン等のラクトン類が挙げられる。これらの有機溶剤は、一種単独又は二種以上を混合して使用することができる。
<Solvent>
In order to improve the handleability of the photosensitive composition or adjust the viscosity and storage stability, a solvent may be added to the photosensitive composition of this embodiment. The solvent is preferably an organic solvent. Such an organic solvent is not particularly limited. For example, ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate and ethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate; propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monoethyl Propylene glycol monoalkyl ethers such as ether, propylene glycol monopropyl ether, propylene glycol monobutyl ether; Propylene glycol dialkyl ethers such as propylene glycol dimethyl ether, propylene glycol diethyl ether, propylene glycol dipropyl ether, propylene glycol dibutyl ether; Propylene glycol Monomethyl ether acete Propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetates such as propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate; cellosolves such as ethyl cellosolve and butyl cellosolve; carbitols such as butyl carbitol; Lactic acid esters such as methyl, ethyl lactate, n-propyl lactate, isopropyl lactate; ethyl acetate, n-propyl acetate, isopropyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, n-amyl acetate, isoamyl acetate, isopropyl propionate, propion Aliphatic carboxylic acid esters such as n-butyl acid and isobutyl propionate; methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, 3- Other esters such as methyl toxipropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate; aromatic hydrocarbons such as toluene, xylene; 2-butanone, 2-heptanone, 3-heptanone, 4 -Ketones such as heptanone and cyclohexanone; Amides such as N, N-dimethylformamide, N-methylacetamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide and N-methylpyrrolidone; Lactones such as γ-butyrolactone. These organic solvents can be used individually by 1 type or in mixture of 2 or more types.

 溶剤の含有量は、溶剤を除く感光性組成物の全量100質量部に対して、30~200質量部であることが好ましく、60~120質量部であることがより好ましい。 The content of the solvent is preferably 30 to 200 parts by mass, and more preferably 60 to 120 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total amount of the photosensitive composition excluding the solvent.

[レジストパターンの形成方法]
 次に、本実施形態のレジストパターンの形成方法を説明する。
[Method of forming resist pattern]
Next, a resist pattern forming method of this embodiment will be described.

 まず、レジストを形成すべき基材(樹脂付き銅箔、銅張積層板、金属スパッタ膜を付けたシリコンウエハー、アルミナ基板等)上に、上述の非感光層と感光層とを備えるドライフィルムを、感光層が基材と接するようにラミネートする。このようにして、基材と、該基材上に感光層と非感光層がこの順に形成された積層体を形成することができる。また、上記積層体は、基材に上記感光性組成物を塗布して感光層を形成し、次いで、該感光層上に上記樹脂組成物を塗布して非感光層を形成してもよい。なお、感光性組成物が溶剤を含む場合は、塗布した感光性組成物を乾燥して感光層を形成してもよい。また、樹脂組成物が溶剤を含む場合は、塗布した樹脂組成物を乾燥して非感光層を形成してもよい。 First, on a base material (resin-coated copper foil, copper-clad laminate, silicon wafer with a metal sputtered film, alumina substrate, etc.) on which a resist is to be formed, a dry film comprising the above-mentioned non-photosensitive layer and photosensitive layer is prepared. Lamination is performed so that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the substrate. Thus, a base material and a laminate in which a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed in this order on the base material can be formed. Moreover, the said laminated body may apply | coat the said photosensitive composition to a base material, and form a photosensitive layer, Then, the said resin composition may be apply | coated on this photosensitive layer, and a non-photosensitive layer may be formed. In addition, when a photosensitive composition contains a solvent, you may dry the apply | coated photosensitive composition and may form a photosensitive layer. Moreover, when a resin composition contains a solvent, you may dry the apply | coated resin composition and form a non-photosensitive layer.

 次に、所定のマスクパターンを介して、感光層を所定のパターンに露光する。露光に用いられる放射線としては、例えば、低圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、メタルハライドランプ、g線ステッパー、i線ステッパー等の紫外線又は電子線、レーザー光線などが挙げられ、露光量としては使用する光源、感光層の厚さ、非感光層の厚さ、非感光層の透過率等によって適宜選定されるが、例えば、高圧水銀灯からの紫外線照射の場合、感光層の厚さ10~50μmでは、100~5000mJ/cm程度である。なお、本実施形態のドライフィルムを用いた場合には、非感光層に放射線を照射することにより、感光層が露光される。なお、支持体が活性光線に対して遮光性を示す場合には、支持体を除去した後に活性光線を照射する。 Next, the photosensitive layer is exposed to a predetermined pattern through a predetermined mask pattern. Examples of radiation used for exposure include low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, metal halide lamps, g-ray steppers, i-line steppers and other ultraviolet rays or electron beams, laser beams, and the like. The thickness is selected as appropriate depending on the thickness, the thickness of the non-photosensitive layer, the transmittance of the non-photosensitive layer, etc. For example, in the case of UV irradiation from a high-pressure mercury lamp, when the photosensitive layer thickness is 10-50 μm, 100-5000 mJ / cm. It is about 2 . In the case where the dry film of this embodiment is used, the photosensitive layer is exposed by irradiating the non-photosensitive layer with radiation. In addition, when a support body shows a light-shielding property with respect to actinic light, after removing a support body, actinic light is irradiated.

 更に、必要に応じて、露光後に加熱処理(露光後ベーク)を行う。露光後ベークを行うことにより、発生した酸による(F)成分と(G)成分の硬化反応を促進させることができる。その条件は感光性組成物の組成、感光層の厚さ等によって好ましい範囲は変動するが、通常、60~150℃で1~60分間程度加熱することが好ましく、70~100℃で1~60分間程度加熱することがより好ましい。 Furthermore, if necessary, heat treatment (post-exposure baking) is performed after exposure. By performing post-exposure baking, the curing reaction of the (F) component and the (G) component by the generated acid can be promoted. The preferable range varies depending on the composition of the photosensitive composition, the thickness of the photosensitive layer, and the like, but it is usually preferable to heat at 60 to 150 ° C. for about 1 to 60 minutes, and at 1 to 60 at 70 to 100 ° C. It is more preferable to heat for about a minute.

 次いで、露光後ベークを行った感光層をアルカリ性現像液により現像して、感光層の、光硬化部以外(未露光部)の領域を溶解、除去する。この場合の現像方法としては、シャワー法、高圧スプレー法、浸漬法、パドル法等が挙げられ、高圧スプレー法が好ましい。一方、非感光層は、感光層と比べて現像液に対する溶解性が低く、露光部における溶解性の変化にも乏しい。そのため、感光層のような明りょうな、非感光層の樹脂パターンが形成されない、又は全く樹脂パターンが形成されない。現像条件としては通常、20~40℃で1~10分間程度である。本実施形態の積層体は、現像することにより、図3に示されるように感光層の未露光部が溶出して未露光部上の非感光層が破れ、感光層及び非感光層を貫通する穴が形成される。 Next, the photosensitive layer that has been baked after exposure is developed with an alkaline developer to dissolve and remove the region other than the photocured portion (unexposed portion) of the photosensitive layer. Examples of the developing method in this case include a shower method, a high-pressure spray method, a dipping method, a paddle method, and the like, and a high-pressure spray method is preferable. On the other hand, the non-photosensitive layer has a lower solubility in a developer than the photosensitive layer, and the solubility change in the exposed area is poor. Therefore, a clear resin pattern of the non-photosensitive layer like the photosensitive layer is not formed, or no resin pattern is formed at all. The development conditions are usually 20 to 40 ° C. for about 1 to 10 minutes. By developing the laminate of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted, the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and penetrates the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer. A hole is formed.

 上記アルカリ性現像液としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア水、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、コリン等のアルカリ性化合物を濃度が1~10質量%程度になるように水に溶解したアルカリ性水溶液が挙げられる。上記アルカリ性水溶液には、例えば、メタノール、エタノール等の水溶性の有機溶剤又は界面活性剤等を適量添加することもできる。なお、アルカリ性現像液で現像した後は、水で洗浄し、乾燥する。アルカリ性現像液は、解像性に優れる点で、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシドが好ましい。 Examples of the alkaline developer include an alkaline aqueous solution in which an alkaline compound such as sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia water, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, and choline is dissolved in water so as to have a concentration of about 1 to 10% by mass. Is mentioned. An appropriate amount of a water-soluble organic solvent such as methanol or ethanol or a surfactant can be added to the alkaline aqueous solution. In addition, after developing with an alkaline developer, it is washed with water and dried. The alkaline developer is preferably tetramethylammonium hydroxide in terms of excellent resolution.

 更に、絶縁膜特性を発現させるため、また、解像性を向上させるために加熱処理を行うことにより、硬化膜(レジストパターン)を得る。この際の硬化条件は特に制限されるものではないが、硬化物の用途に応じて、50~250℃で30分~10時間程度加熱し、感光性組成物を硬化させることができる。 Furthermore, a cured film (resist pattern) is obtained by performing a heat treatment in order to develop the insulating film characteristics and improve the resolution. The curing conditions at this time are not particularly limited, but the photosensitive composition can be cured by heating at 50 to 250 ° C. for about 30 minutes to 10 hours depending on the use of the cured product.

 また、硬化を十分に進行させるため、又は得られたパターン形状の変形を防止するために二段階で加熱することもできる。例えば、第一段階で、50~120℃で5分~2時間程度加熱し、更に第二段階で、80~200℃で10分~10時間程度加熱して硬化させることもできる。 Also, heating can be performed in two stages in order to sufficiently advance the curing or to prevent deformation of the obtained pattern shape. For example, it can be cured by heating at 50 to 120 ° C. for about 5 minutes to 2 hours in the first stage and further heating at 80 to 200 ° C. for about 10 minutes to 10 hours in the second stage.

 このような硬化条件であれば、加熱設備として一般的なオーブン、赤外線炉等を使用することができる。本実施形態の積層体は、現像後に加熱処理することにより、図4に示されるように破れた非感光層が穴の壁面に融着してビアが形成される。なお、穴の形状と同じような形状で非感光層が破れた場合、必ずしも、非感光層が穴の壁面に融着していなくてもよい。 Under such curing conditions, a general oven, infrared furnace, or the like can be used as a heating facility. The laminated body of the present embodiment is heat-treated after development, whereby the non-photosensitive layer torn as shown in FIG. 4 is fused to the wall surface of the hole to form a via. When the non-photosensitive layer is torn in a shape similar to the shape of the hole, the non-photosensitive layer does not necessarily have to be fused to the wall surface of the hole.

 回路を形成するための方法については特に制限はなく、内層回路の上に感光層及び非感光層を形成し、この非感光層の上に、めっき法により外層回路を形成する。外層回路の形成では、まず、非感光層を粗化処理するのが好ましい。粗化液としては、クロム/硫酸粗化液、アルカリ過マンガン酸粗化液、フッ化ナトリウム/クロム/硫酸粗化液、ホウフッ酸粗化液等の酸化性粗化液を用いることができる。粗化処理としては、例えば、まず膨潤液として、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルとNaOHとの水溶液を80℃に加温して積層板又は多層配線板を5分間浸漬処理する。次に、粗化液として、KMnOとNaOHとの水溶液を80℃に加温して10分間浸漬処理する。引き続き、中和液、例えば、塩化第一錫(SnCl)の塩酸水溶液に室温で5分間浸漬処理し、KMnOを還元する。 The method for forming the circuit is not particularly limited, and a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed on the inner layer circuit, and an outer layer circuit is formed on the non-photosensitive layer by a plating method. In forming the outer layer circuit, it is preferable to first roughen the non-photosensitive layer. As the roughening liquid, an oxidizing roughening liquid such as a chromium / sulfuric acid roughening liquid, an alkaline permanganic acid roughening liquid, a sodium fluoride / chromium / sulfuric acid roughening liquid, or a borofluoric acid roughening liquid can be used. As the roughening treatment, for example, an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether and NaOH is first heated as a swelling solution to 80 ° C., and the laminate or multilayer wiring board is immersed for 5 minutes. Next, as a roughening solution, an aqueous solution of KMnO 4 and NaOH is heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes. Subsequently, KMnO 4 is reduced by immersing in a neutralizing solution, for example, an aqueous hydrochloric acid solution of stannous chloride (SnCl 2 ) at room temperature for 5 minutes.

 粗化処理後、パラジウムを付着させるめっき触媒付与処理を行う。めっき触媒処理は、塩化パラジウム系のめっき触媒液に浸漬して行われる。次に、無電解めっき液に浸漬して非感光層の表面全面に厚さが0.1~1.5μmの無電解めっき層(導体層)を析出させる。必要により、更に電気めっきを行って必要な厚さとする。無電解めっきに使用する無電解めっき液は、公知の無電解めっき液を使用することができ、特に制限はない。また、電気めっきについても公知の方法によることができ特に制限はない。これらのめっきは銅めっきであることが好ましい。更に、不要な箇所をエッチング除去して回路層を形成することができる。更に、同様の工程を繰り返して、層数の多い多層配線板を製造できる。 After the roughening treatment, a plating catalyst applying treatment for adhering palladium is performed. The plating catalyst treatment is performed by immersing in a palladium chloride plating catalyst solution. Next, it is immersed in an electroless plating solution to deposit an electroless plating layer (conductor layer) having a thickness of 0.1 to 1.5 μm on the entire surface of the non-photosensitive layer. If necessary, further electroplating is performed to obtain a necessary thickness. As the electroless plating solution used for electroless plating, a known electroless plating solution can be used, and there is no particular limitation. Also, electroplating can be performed by a known method and is not particularly limited. These platings are preferably copper platings. Furthermore, unnecessary portions can be removed by etching to form a circuit layer. Furthermore, a multilayer wiring board with many layers can be manufactured by repeating the same process.

 なお、粗化処理はビアのスミアを除去するためにも行うことができる。 The roughening treatment can also be performed to remove via smear.

[多層プリント配線板]
 本実施形態の樹脂組成物及び感光性組成物から形成される硬化物は、例えば、半導体素子の表面保護膜(オーバーコート膜)及び/又は層間絶縁膜(パッシベーション膜)、あるいは、多層プリント配線板におけるソルダーレジスト及び/又は層間絶縁層として好適に用いることができるともいえる。中でも、銅めっきとの密着性に優れるため、層間絶縁層として、好適に用いることができる。図2は、本実施形態の樹脂組成物及び感光性組成物の硬化物を層間絶縁材料として含む多層プリント配線板の製造方法を示す図である。図2(f)に示す多層プリント配線板100Aは表面及び内部に配線パターンを有する。以下、本開示の一実施形態の、多層プリント配線板100Aの製造方法を図2に基づいて簡単に説明する。
[Multilayer printed wiring board]
The cured product formed from the resin composition and the photosensitive composition of the present embodiment is, for example, a surface protection film (overcoat film) and / or an interlayer insulating film (passivation film) of a semiconductor element, or a multilayer printed wiring board. It can be said that it can be suitably used as a solder resist and / or an interlayer insulating layer. Especially, since it is excellent in adhesiveness with copper plating, it can be used suitably as an interlayer insulation layer. FIG. 2 is a view showing a method for producing a multilayer printed wiring board including the cured resin composition and photosensitive composition of the present embodiment as an interlayer insulating material. The multilayer printed wiring board 100A shown in FIG. 2 (f) has a wiring pattern on the surface and inside. Hereinafter, a method of manufacturing the multilayer printed wiring board 100A according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

 まず、表面に配線パターン102を形成した基材101の両面に層間絶縁層103を形成する(図2(a)参照)。層間絶縁層103は、上述のドライフィルムを予め準備し、ラミネータを用いて、該ドライフィルムにおける感光層及び非感光層を、感光層がプリント配線板に接するように貼り付けて形成することができる。あるいは、ドライフィルムを用いずに、上記基材に上記感光性組成物を塗布して感光層を形成し、次いで、該感光層上に上記樹脂組成物を塗布して非感光層を形成することにより、層間絶縁層103を形成してもよい。また、感光性組成物又は樹脂組成物を乾燥してもよい。なお、図2においては、簡略化のため、層間絶縁層103を単一の層として表現したが、実際には感光層及び非感光層の2層に分かれている。 First, an interlayer insulating layer 103 is formed on both surfaces of a base material 101 having a wiring pattern 102 formed on the surface (see FIG. 2A). The interlayer insulating layer 103 can be formed by preparing the above-described dry film in advance and using a laminator to attach the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer of the dry film so that the photosensitive layer is in contact with the printed wiring board. . Alternatively, without using a dry film, the photosensitive composition is applied to the substrate to form a photosensitive layer, and then the resin composition is applied onto the photosensitive layer to form a non-photosensitive layer. Thus, the interlayer insulating layer 103 may be formed. Moreover, you may dry the photosensitive composition or the resin composition. In FIG. 2, the interlayer insulating layer 103 is expressed as a single layer for simplification, but is actually divided into a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer.

 次いで、外部と電気的に接続することが必要な箇所以外の領域を露光し、現像処理し、次いで、加熱処理することで、開口部104を形成する(図2(b)参照)。開口部104周辺のスミア(残渣)はデスミア処理により除去する。次いで、無電解めっき法によりシード層105を形成する(図2(c)参照)。上記シード層105上にセミアディティブ用感光性エレメントの、における感光層を形成し、所定の箇所を露光、現像処理して樹脂パターン106を形成する(図2(d)参照)。次いで、電解めっき法によりシード層105の樹脂パターン106が形成されていない部分に配線パターン107を形成し、剥離液により樹脂パターン106を除去した後、上記シード層105の配線パターン107が形成されていない部分をエッチングにより除去する(図2(e)参照)。以上の操作を繰り返し行い、最表面にソルダーレジスト108を形成することで多層プリント配線板100Aを作製することができる(図2(f)参照)。 Next, an opening 104 is formed by exposing a region other than a portion that needs to be electrically connected to the outside, developing, and then performing heat treatment (see FIG. 2B). Smear (residue) around the opening 104 is removed by desmear treatment. Next, a seed layer 105 is formed by an electroless plating method (see FIG. 2C). A photosensitive layer of the semi-additive photosensitive element is formed on the seed layer 105, and a predetermined portion is exposed and developed to form a resin pattern 106 (see FIG. 2D). Next, a wiring pattern 107 is formed on the portion of the seed layer 105 where the resin pattern 106 is not formed by electrolytic plating, and the resin pattern 106 is removed using a stripping solution, and then the wiring pattern 107 of the seed layer 105 is formed. Unexposed portions are removed by etching (see FIG. 2E). The multilayer printed wiring board 100A can be manufactured by repeating the above operation and forming the solder resist 108 on the outermost surface (see FIG. 2F).

 このようにして得られた多層プリント配線板100Aは、対応する箇所に半導体素子が実装され、電気的な接続を確保することが可能である。 In the multilayer printed wiring board 100A obtained in this way, semiconductor elements are mounted at corresponding locations, and electrical connection can be ensured.

(第二実施形態)
 以下、本開示の第二実施形態について説明する。第二実施形態に係るドライフィルムは、感光層と非感光層とを備えるドライフィルムであって、基材上に感光層と非感光層とをこの順で形成し、感光層を露光し、ドライフィルムを現像することにより、感光層の未露光部が溶出して未露光部上の非感光層が破れ、現像後の加熱処理によって非感光層が破れた箇所にビアが形成できるという機能を有するものである。
(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present disclosure will be described. The dry film according to the second embodiment is a dry film including a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, and a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer are formed on a substrate in this order, and the photosensitive layer is exposed to dry By developing the film, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted and the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken, and a via can be formed at a location where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by the heat treatment after development. Is.

 ここで、本実施形態に係るドライフィルムは、例えば、基材上に感光層と非感光層とをこの順で形成し、上述の方法で感光層を所定のパターンで露光した後に、非感光層及び感光層を、2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド水溶液を用いて最短現像時間(感光層の未露光部が除去される最短時間)の2倍に相当する時間でスプレーすることで、図3に示されるように感光層の未露光部が溶出して未露光部上の非感光層が破れるものである。現像したドライフィルムには、感光層及び非感光層を貫通する穴が形成される。なお、ここでいう現像は、上述のスプレー法以外の方法で行うこともできる。また、ドライフィルムを現像する前に露光された感光層を加熱処理してもよい。露光後加熱処理は、上述の第一実施形態における露光後加熱処理の条件と同じ条件であることが好ましい。 Here, the dry film according to the present embodiment includes, for example, a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer formed in this order on a substrate, and after exposing the photosensitive layer in a predetermined pattern by the above-described method, the non-photosensitive layer And by spraying the photosensitive layer with an aqueous 2.38 mass% tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution for a time corresponding to twice the shortest development time (the shortest time for removing the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer). As shown in FIG. 3, the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is eluted and the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is broken. In the developed dry film, a hole penetrating the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer is formed. The development here can also be performed by a method other than the spray method described above. Moreover, you may heat-process the photosensitive layer exposed before developing a dry film. The post-exposure heat treatment is preferably performed under the same conditions as the post-exposure heat treatment in the first embodiment described above.

 その後、現像したドライフィルムを加熱処理することにより、図4に示されるように破れた非感光層が穴の壁面に融着してビアが形成される。加熱処理としては、例えば、50~250℃で30分~10時間程度の一段階で行うことができるが、第一段階で、50~120℃で5分~2時間程度加熱し、更に第二段階で、80~200℃で10分~10時間程度加熱する二段階で行うこともできる。 Thereafter, the developed dry film is heat-treated, so that the torn non-photosensitive layer is fused to the wall surface of the hole as shown in FIG. 4 to form a via. The heat treatment can be performed, for example, at 50 to 250 ° C. for about 30 minutes to 10 hours in one stage. In the first stage, heating is performed at 50 to 120 ° C. for about 5 minutes to 2 hours, and then the second treatment. The heating may be performed in two steps at 80 to 200 ° C. for about 10 minutes to 10 hours.

 本実施形態のドライフィルムにおける非感光層及び感光層としては、上述の機能を備えるものであれば、特に制限されないが、例えば、上述の第一実施形態で説明した感光層及び非感光層が挙げられる。また、本実施形態のドライフィルムを用いることにより、上述の方法でレジストパターン及び多層プリント配線板を形成することができる。なお、感光層がポジ型である場合、感光層の露光部が溶出して露光部上の非感光層が破れるが、現像後の加熱処理により非感光層が破れた箇所にビアが形成できる。 The non-photosensitive layer and the photosensitive layer in the dry film of the present embodiment are not particularly limited as long as they have the functions described above, and examples thereof include the photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer described in the first embodiment. It is done. Moreover, a resist pattern and a multilayer printed wiring board can be formed by the above-mentioned method by using the dry film of this embodiment. When the photosensitive layer is a positive type, the exposed portion of the photosensitive layer elutes and the non-photosensitive layer on the exposed portion is broken, but vias can be formed at locations where the non-photosensitive layer is broken by the heat treatment after development.

 以下、実施例により本開示を詳細に説明するが、本開示はこれら実施例により何ら限定されるものではない。なお、以下の実施例及び比較例における部は特に断らない限り質量部の意味で用いる。 Hereinafter, the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to examples, but the present disclosure is not limited to the examples. In addition, unless otherwise indicated, the part in a following example and a comparative example is used by the meaning of a mass part.

<実施例A1~A13、及び比較例A1~A15>
(合成例A1)ポリアミドAの合成
 まず、ディーンスターク還流冷却器、温度計、及び撹拌器を備えた1Lのセパラブルフラスコに、イソフタル酸22g(132mmol)、3,4’-オキシジアニリン26.4g(132mmol)、塩化リチウム3.9g、塩化カルシウム12.1g、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン240ml及びピリジン54mlを入れ、攪拌溶解させた後、亜リン酸トリフェニル74gを加えて、90℃で4時間反応させて、ポリアミド樹脂の溶液を得た。この溶液をメタノール20Lに投入してポリアミド樹脂を析出させ、ポリアミドAを得た。
<Examples A1 to A13 and Comparative Examples A1 to A15>
(Synthesis Example A1) Synthesis of Polyamide A First, in a 1 L separable flask equipped with a Dean-Stark reflux condenser, a thermometer, and a stirrer, 22 g (132 mmol) of isophthalic acid, 3,4′-oxydianiline 26. 4 g (132 mmol), lithium chloride 3.9 g, calcium chloride 12.1 g, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone 240 ml and pyridine 54 ml were added and dissolved by stirring. Then, 74 g of triphenyl phosphite was added, and the mixture was heated at 90 ° C. Reaction was performed for 4 hours to obtain a polyamide resin solution. This solution was added to 20 L of methanol to precipitate a polyamide resin, and polyamide A was obtained.

(合成例A2)ポリアミドイミドAの合成
 まず、ディーンスターク還流冷却器、温度計、及び撹拌器を備えた1Lのセパラブルフラスコに、飽和脂環式炭化水素基を有するジアミン化合物Aとして(4,4’-ジアミノ)ジシクロヘキシルメタン(ワンダミンHM(WHM)、新日本理化社製、商品名)45mmol、シロキサンジアミン化合物Bとして反応性シリコーンオイル(X-22-161-B、信越化学工業株式会社製、アミン当量:1500、商品名)5mmol、無水トリメリット酸(TMA)105mmol、及び非プロトン性極性溶媒としてN-メチル-2-ピロリドン(NMP)145gを入れ、フラスコ内の温度を80℃に設定して30分間撹拌した後、水と共沸可能な芳香族炭化水素としてトルエン100mLを更に添加し、フラスコ内の温度を160℃に昇温して約2時間還流した。水分定量受器に理論量の水が貯留され、水の留出が見られなくなっていることを確認した後、水分定量受器中の水を除去しながら、フラスコ内の温度を190℃まで上昇させて反応溶液中のトルエンを除去した。
 フラスコ内の溶液を室温まで戻した後、ジイソシアネートとして4,4’-ジフェニルメタンジイソシアネート(MDI)60mmolを添加し、フラスコ内の温度を190℃に上昇させて2時間反応させた後、NMPで希釈してポリアミドイミドのNMP溶液を得た。このNMP溶液をメタノール20Lに投入してポリアミドイミド樹脂を析出させ、ポリアミドイミドAを得た。
(Synthesis Example A2) Synthesis of Polyamidoimide A First, a diamine compound A having a saturated alicyclic hydrocarbon group (4, 4) was added to a 1 L separable flask equipped with a Dean-Stark reflux condenser, a thermometer, and a stirrer. 4'-diamino) dicyclohexylmethane (Wandamine HM (WHM), manufactured by Shin Nippon Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name) 45 mmol, reactive silicone oil as siloxane diamine compound B (X-22-161-B, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) Amine equivalent: 1500, trade name: 5 mmol, trimellitic anhydride (TMA) 105 mmol, and 145 g of N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone (NMP) as an aprotic polar solvent were added, and the temperature in the flask was set to 80 ° C. After stirring for 30 minutes, add 100 mL of toluene as an aromatic hydrocarbon azeotropic with water. It added, the temperature in the flask was refluxed heated to approximately 2 hours to 160 ° C.. After confirming that the theoretical amount of water was stored in the moisture meter and no water distilling was observed, the temperature in the flask was increased to 190 ° C while removing the water in the meter. The toluene in the reaction solution was removed.
After returning the solution in the flask to room temperature, 60 mmol of 4,4′-diphenylmethane diisocyanate (MDI) was added as a diisocyanate, the temperature in the flask was raised to 190 ° C. and reacted for 2 hours, and then diluted with NMP. Thus, an NMP solution of polyamideimide was obtained. This NMP solution was added to 20 L of methanol to precipitate a polyamideimide resin, and polyamideimide A was obtained.

[非感光層を形成するために用いられる樹脂組成物の溶液(ワニス)の調製]
(ワニスa-I)
 (C)成分である合成例A1で得られたポリアミドA1.8gに、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド(DMAc)を15.9g配合した後、続いて(A)成分であるビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂(NC3000H、日本化薬株式会社製、商品名)5.0g、(B-1)成分であるクレゾールノボラック型フェノール樹脂(KA1165、DIC株式会社製、商品名)2.1gを加え、更に硬化促進剤として2-フェニルイミダゾール(2PZ、四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名)0.050gを添加した後、DMAc及びメチルエチルケトンからなる混合溶剤で希釈し、(D)成分である無機フィラー(AEROSIL R972、日本アエロジル株式会社製、商品名)0.50gを加え、分散機(ナノマイザー、吉田機械興業株式会社製、商品名)を用いて、ワニスa-I(固形分濃度約25質量%)を得た。
[Preparation of resin composition solution (varnish) used to form non-photosensitive layer]
(Varnish a-1)
After blending 15.9 g of N, N-dimethylacetamide (DMAc) with 1.8 g of the polyamide A obtained in Synthesis Example A1 as the component (C), the biphenyl aralkyl epoxy resin (A) as the component (A) is subsequently added. NC3000H, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name) 5.0 g, (B-1) component cresol novolac type phenol resin (KA1165, DIC Corporation, trade name) 2.1 g is added, and further curing accelerator After adding 0.050 g of 2-phenylimidazole (2PZ, trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), it is diluted with a mixed solvent consisting of DMAc and methyl ethyl ketone, and (D) component inorganic filler (AEROSIL R972, Japan) Aerosil Co., Ltd., trade name: 0.50 g was added, and the disperser (Nanomizer, Yoshida Machine Industry Co., Ltd.) Product, product name) was used to obtain varnish a-I (solid content concentration of about 25% by mass).

(ワニスa-II)
 ワニスa-Iの(D)成分を除く以外は、ワニスa-Iと同様の方法でワニスa-IIを得た。
(Varnish a-II)
Varnish a-II was obtained in the same manner as varnish a-I except that the component (D) of varnish a-I was removed.

(ワニスa-III)
 (C)成分であるフェノール性水酸基含有ポリアミド(BPAM-155、日本化薬株式会社製、商品名)1.8gに、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド(DMAc)を15.9g配合した後、続いて(A)成分であるビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂(NC3000H、日本化薬株式会社製、商品名)5.0g、(B-1)成分であるクレゾールノボラック型フェノール樹脂(KA1165、DIC株式会社製、商品名)2.1gを加え、更に硬化促進剤として2-フェニルイミダゾール(2PZ、四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名)0.050gを添加し、DMAc及びメチルエチルケトンからなる混合溶剤で希釈した後、(D)成分である無機フィラー(AEROSIL R202、日本アエロジル株式会社製、商品名)0.50gを加え、分散機(ナノマイザー、吉田機械興業株式会社製、商品名)を用いて、ワニスa-III(固形分濃度約25質量%)を得た。
(Varnish a-III)
After blending 15.9 g of N, N-dimethylacetamide (DMAc) with 1.8 g of the phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polyamide (BPAM-155, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name) as component (C), (A) component biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resin (NC3000H, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name) 5.0 g, (B-1) component cresol novolac type phenol resin (KA1165, manufactured by DIC Corporation, product) Name) 2.1 g was added, and further, 0.050 g of 2-phenylimidazole (2PZ, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name) was added as a curing accelerator, and diluted with a mixed solvent consisting of DMAc and methyl ethyl ketone. D) 0.50 g of inorganic filler (AEROSIL R202, Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., trade name) as a component In addition, varnish a-III (solid content concentration: about 25 mass%) was obtained using a disperser (Nanomizer, trade name, manufactured by Yoshida Kikai Kogyo Co., Ltd.).

(ワニスa-IV)
 (C)成分であるフェノール性水酸基含有ポリアミド(BPAM-155、日本化薬株式会社製、商品名)1.8gに、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド(DMAc)を15.9g配合した後、続いて架橋有機フィラー(EXL-2655、ローム・アンド・ハース・ジャパン株式会社製、商品名)0.27g、(A)成分であるビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂(NC3000H、日本化薬株式会社製、商品名)5.0g、(B-1)成分であるビスフェノールAノボラック型フェノール樹脂(YLH129、油化シェルエポキシ社製、商品名)2.0gを加え、更に硬化促進剤として2-フェニルイミダゾール(2PZ、四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名)0.050gを添加し、DMAc及びメチルエチルケトンからなる混合溶剤で希釈した後、(D)成分である無機フィラー(AEROSIL R202、日本アエロジル株式会社製、商品名)0.52gを加え、分散機(ナノマイザー、吉田機械興業株式会社製、商品名)を用いて、ワニスa-IV(固形分濃度約25質量%)を得た。
(Varnish a-IV)
After blending 15.9 g of N, N-dimethylacetamide (DMAc) with 1.8 g of the phenolic hydroxyl group-containing polyamide (BPAM-155, Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name) as component (C), Cross-linked organic filler (EXL-2655, manufactured by Rohm and Haas Japan Co., Ltd., trade name) 0.27 g, biphenylaralkyl type epoxy resin (NC3000H, manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name) as component (A) 5.0 g of bisphenol A novolak type phenolic resin (YLH129, manufactured by Yuka Shell Epoxy Co., Ltd., trade name) as component (B-1) was added, and 2-phenylimidazole (2PZ, Shikoku) was further added as a curing accelerator. Made by Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name) 0.050 g is added, and it is a mixed solvent consisting of DMAc and methyl ethyl ketone. After adding 0.52 g of inorganic filler (AEROSIL R202, Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., trade name) as component (D), using a disperser (Nanomizer, Yoshida Kikai Co., Ltd., trade name), Varnish a-IV (solid content concentration of about 25% by mass) was obtained.

(ワニスa-V)
 (C)成分である合成例A2で得られたポリアミドイミドA0.32gに、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド(DMAc)を1.3g配合した後、続いて架橋有機フィラー(EXL-2655、ローム・アンド・ハース・ジャパン株式会社製、商品名)0.96g、(A)成分であるフェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂(N770、DIC社製、商品名)5.0g、(B-1)成分であるフェノールノボラック型フェノール樹脂(TD2090、DIC株式会社製、商品名)2.8gを加え、更に硬化促進剤として2-フェニルイミダゾール(2PZ、四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名)0.050gを添加した後、DMAc及びメチルエチルケトンからなる混合溶剤で希釈し、(D)成分である無機フィラー(AEROSIL R972、日本アエロジル株式会社製、商品名)0.54gを加え、分散機(ナノマイザー、吉田機械興業株式会社製、商品名)を用いて、ワニスa-V(固形分濃度約25質量%)を得た。
(Varnish aV)
After blending 1.3 g of N, N-dimethylacetamide (DMAc) with 0.32 g of polyamideimide A obtained in Synthesis Example A2 as component (C), subsequently, a crosslinked organic filler (EXL-2655, Rohm and -Hearth Japan Co., Ltd., trade name: 0.96 g, (A) component phenol novolac epoxy resin (N770, DIC, trade name) 5.0 g, (B-1) component phenol novolac After adding 2.8 g of type phenolic resin (TD2090, manufactured by DIC Corporation, trade name), and further adding 0.050 g of 2-phenylimidazole (2PZ, trade name, manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) as a curing accelerator, Dilute with a mixed solvent consisting of DMAc and methyl ethyl ketone, and (D) component inorganic filler (AEROSIL R972, JP 0.54 g of this Aerosil Co., Ltd., trade name) was added, and varnish a-V (solid content concentration of about 25% by mass) was obtained using a disperser (Nanomizer, Yoshida Kikai Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name). .

(ワニスa-VI)
 49gのポリアミドA、及び1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテート(四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名「2PZ-CNS」)0.15gを、溶媒であるメチルエチルケトン40gに溶解して、ワニスa-VIを得た。
(Varnish a-VI)
49 g of polyamide A and 0.15 g of 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate (manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name “2PZ-CNS”) were dissolved in 40 g of methyl ethyl ketone as a solvent to obtain varnish. a-VI was obtained.

(ワニスa-VII)
 49gのポリアミドA、及びエステル基含有樹脂(DIC株式会社、商品名「EXB-9460S」、エステル当量:223)27gを、溶媒であるメチルエチルケトン40gに溶解して、ワニスa-VIIを得た。
(Varnish a-VII)
49 g of polyamide A and 27 g of ester group-containing resin (DIC Corporation, trade name “EXB-9460S”, ester equivalent: 223) were dissolved in 40 g of methyl ethyl ketone as a solvent to obtain varnish a-VII.

<感光性組成物の溶液(ワニス)の調製>
 ノボラック樹脂(F-1~F-2)100質量部に対し、アルコキシアルキル化合物(G-1)、グリシジルオキシ基又はアクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物(H-1~H-3)、光感応性酸発生剤(I-1)、溶剤を表1に示した所定量(単位:質量部)にて配合し、ワニスb-I~b-Vを得た。

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000014
<Preparation of solution (varnish) of photosensitive composition>
An alkoxyalkyl compound (G-1), a compound having a glycidyloxy group or an acryloyloxy group (H-1 to H-3), a photo-sensitive acid with respect to 100 parts by mass of the novolak resin (F-1 to F-2) The generator (I-1) and the solvent were blended in the predetermined amounts (unit: parts by mass) shown in Table 1 to obtain varnishes bI to bV.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000014

F-1:クレゾールノボラック樹脂(旭有機材工業株式会社製、商品名;TR4020G)
F-2:クレゾールノボラック樹脂(旭有機材工業株式会社製、商品名;TR4080G)
G-1:1,3,4,6-テトラキス(メトキシメチル)グリコールウリル(株式会社三和ケミカル製、商品名「MX-270」)
H-1:トリメチロールプロパントリグリシジルエーテル(新日鉄住金化学株式会社製、商品名:ZX-1542、下記式(3)参照)
F-1: Cresol novolak resin (Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd., trade name: TR4020G)
F-2: Cresol novolac resin (Asahi Organic Materials Co., Ltd., trade name: TR4080G)
G-1: 1,3,4,6-tetrakis (methoxymethyl) glycoluril (manufactured by Sanwa Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name “MX-270”)
H-1: Trimethylolpropane triglycidyl ether (manufactured by Nippon Steel & Sumikin Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: ZX-1542, see formula (3) below)

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

H-2:トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート(日本化薬株式会社製、商品名:TMPTA)
H-3:ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート(日本化薬株式会社製、商品名:PET-30)
I-1:トリアリールスルホニウム塩(サンアプロ株式会社製、商品名:CPI-310B)溶剤:メチルエチルケトン(和光純薬工業株式会社製)
D’-1:3-メタクリロイルオキシプロピルトリメトキシシランでカップリング処理した、一次粒径の平均が15nmであるゾルゲルシリカ
H-2: Trimethylolpropane triacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: TMPTA)
H-3: Pentaerythritol triacrylate (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., trade name: PET-30)
I-1: Triarylsulfonium salt (manufactured by San Apro Co., Ltd., trade name: CPI-310B) Solvent: methyl ethyl ketone (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.)
Sol-gel silica having an average primary particle size of 15 nm, which is coupled with D′-1: 3-methacryloyloxypropyltrimethoxysilane

<ドライフィルムの作製>
 上記で得られた、非感光層の形成に用いる樹脂組成物の溶液を、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(帝人デュポンフィルム株式会社製、製品名「ピューレックスA53」)(支持体)上に厚みが均一になるように塗布し、100~140℃の熱風対流式乾燥機で10分間乾燥して、乾燥後の膜厚が表2及び3に示す厚さとなるように非感光層を形成した。次に、非感光層上に上記で得られた感光性組成物の溶液を厚みが均一になるように塗布し、90℃の熱風対流式乾燥機で10分間乾燥して、乾燥後の膜厚が表2及び3に示す厚さとなるように感光層を形成した。感光層上にポリプロピレンフィルム(タマポリ株式会社製、製品名「NF-15」)(保護層)を貼り合わせ、ドライフィルムをそれぞれ得た。作製したドライフィルムの構成を表2及び3に示す。なお、表2において、実施例A1では、支持体上に、ワニスa-Iを用いて形成した非感光層(厚み:0.5μm)と、ワニスb-Iを用いて形成した感光層(厚み:10μm)と、保護層とをこの順で備えるドライフィルムを作製したことを意味する。その他の実施例及び比較例も、それぞれ対応する樹脂組成物の溶液を用いて、ドライフィルムを作製した。
<Production of dry film>
The solution of the resin composition used for forming the non-photosensitive layer obtained above becomes uniform in thickness on a polyethylene terephthalate film (product name “Purex A53” manufactured by Teijin DuPont Films Ltd.) (support). And dried for 10 minutes with a hot air convection dryer at 100 to 140 ° C. to form a non-photosensitive layer so that the film thickness after drying was as shown in Tables 2 and 3. Next, the solution of the photosensitive composition obtained above is applied onto the non-photosensitive layer so that the thickness is uniform, and dried for 10 minutes in a hot air convection dryer at 90 ° C., and the film thickness after drying The photosensitive layer was formed so as to have the thicknesses shown in Tables 2 and 3. A polypropylene film (manufactured by Tamapoly Co., Ltd., product name “NF-15”) (protective layer) was bonded onto the photosensitive layer to obtain dry films. The composition of the produced dry film is shown in Tables 2 and 3. In Table 2, in Example A1, a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 0.5 μm) formed using varnish a-I and a photosensitive layer (thickness) formed using varnish b-I on the support. : 10 μm) and a dry film comprising a protective layer in this order. In other examples and comparative examples, dry films were prepared using solutions of the corresponding resin compositions.

<評価用積層体の作製>
 上記ドライフィルムの保護層を剥離しながら、感光層が6インチのシリコンウエハーのシリコン表面に接するように、保護層を剥離しながら、ラミネートした。ラミネートは、連プレス式真空ラミネータ(株式会社名機製作所製、商品名「MVLP-500」)を用いて、圧着圧力0.4MPa、プレス熱板温度90℃、真空引き時間20秒間、ラミネートプレス時間20秒間及び気圧4kPa以下で行った。次いで、支持体を剥離して、評価用積層体を得た。
<Preparation of evaluation laminate>
While peeling off the protective layer of the dry film, lamination was performed while peeling off the protective layer so that the photosensitive layer was in contact with the silicon surface of the 6-inch silicon wafer. Lamination is performed using a continuous press type vacuum laminator (trade name “MVLP-500”, manufactured by Meiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), pressure bonding pressure 0.4 MPa, press hot plate temperature 90 ° C., evacuation time 20 seconds, laminating press time. The test was performed for 20 seconds and at a pressure of 4 kPa or less. Subsequently, the support was peeled off to obtain an evaluation laminate.

<解像性の評価>
 上述の方法で作製した評価用積層体を露光した。露光は、i線ステッパー(キヤノン株式会社製、商品名「FPA-3000iW」)を用いてi線(365nm)で、マスクを介して、縮小投影露光を行った。マスクとしては、ビアパターンサイズzμmφ(z=8、10、15、20、30、40、50、60、70)を有するものを用いた。また、露光量は、100~3000mJ/cmの範囲で、100mJ/cmずつ変化させながら、縮小投影露光を行った。
<Evaluation of resolution>
The evaluation laminated body produced by the above-mentioned method was exposed. Exposure was reduced projection exposure through a mask with i-line (365 nm) using an i-line stepper (trade name “FPA-3000iW” manufactured by Canon Inc.). A mask having a via pattern size z μmφ (z = 8, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70) was used. The exposure amount is in the range of 100 ~ 3000mJ / cm 2, while changing by 100 mJ / cm 2, was subjected to the reduction projection exposure.

 次いで、露光された感光層を65℃で1分間、次いで75℃で8分間加熱し(露光後ベーク)、2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド水溶液を用いて最短現像時間(感光層の未露光部が除去される最短時間)の2倍に相当する時間でスプレーすることで、感光層の未露光部を除去した(現像処理)。現像処理後、180℃60分間の条件で加熱処理した。加熱処理後、金属顕微鏡を用いて形成されたビアパターンを観察し、最小のビアパターンサイズで、解像性を評価した。評価結果を表2及び3に示す。また、実施例A3の、現像処理後及び加熱処理後のビアの走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)写真を、それぞれ図3及び図4に示す。図3に示されるように、現像により感光層の未露光部が除去された際に、未露光部上の非感光層が破れて、現像後の感光層及び非感光層を貫通する穴が形成されていた。また、図4に示されるように、現像後に加熱処理を行うと、図3に示される非感光層の破れた部分が穴の壁面に融着してビアが形成された。また、ワニスa-VI~VIIからなる非感光層を用いた比較例A14及び15の場合には、120秒間スプレーし、次いで、加熱処理したが、非感光層が破れず、ビアが形成できないことが分かった。
 なお、現像は、現像機のノズルはフルコーンタイプを使用し、0.15MPaの圧力でスプレーすることにより行った。上記積層体とノズル先端の距離は6cmであり、試験片の中心とノズルの中心が一致するように配置した。
The exposed photosensitive layer is then heated at 65 ° C. for 1 minute and then at 75 ° C. for 8 minutes (post-exposure bake), using a 2.38% by weight aqueous tetramethylammonium hydroxide solution to develop the shortest development time (the photosensitive layer The unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer was removed (development process) by spraying for a time corresponding to twice the shortest time for removing the exposed portion). After the development processing, heat treatment was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes. After the heat treatment, the via pattern formed using a metal microscope was observed, and the resolution was evaluated with the minimum via pattern size. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3. Moreover, the scanning electron microscope (SEM) photograph of the via | veer after development processing and heat processing of Example A3 is shown in FIG.3 and FIG.4, respectively. As shown in FIG. 3, when the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is removed by development, the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is torn and a hole that penetrates the developed photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer is formed. It had been. As shown in FIG. 4, when heat treatment was performed after development, the torn part of the non-photosensitive layer shown in FIG. 3 was fused to the wall surface of the hole to form a via. In the case of Comparative Examples A14 and 15 using the non-photosensitive layer composed of varnish a-VI to VII, spraying was performed for 120 seconds and then heat treatment was performed, but the non-photosensitive layer was not broken and a via could not be formed. I understood.
The development was performed by spraying at a pressure of 0.15 MPa using a full cone type nozzle of the developing machine. The distance between the laminate and the tip of the nozzle was 6 cm, and the center of the test piece and the center of the nozzle were aligned.

<接着強度(ピール強度)及び表面粗さの評価>
 上述の方法で作製した評価用積層体を露光した。露光は、高圧水銀灯を有する露光機(株式会社オーク製作所製、商品名「EXM-1201」)を用いて、照射エネルギー量が3000mJ/cmとなるように非感光層又は感光層を露光した。露光された評価用積層体をホットプレート上にて65℃で2分間、次いで95℃で8分間加熱した(露光後ベーク)。さらに、熱風対流式乾燥機にて180℃で60分間加熱処理し、硬化膜を得た。
<Evaluation of adhesive strength (peel strength) and surface roughness>
The evaluation laminated body produced by the above-mentioned method was exposed. For the exposure, the non-photosensitive layer or the photosensitive layer was exposed using an exposure machine having a high-pressure mercury lamp (trade name “EXM-1201” manufactured by Oak Manufacturing Co., Ltd.) so that the irradiation energy amount was 3000 mJ / cm 2 . The exposed evaluation laminate was heated on a hot plate at 65 ° C. for 2 minutes and then at 95 ° C. for 8 minutes (post exposure bake). Furthermore, it heat-processed for 60 minutes at 180 degreeC with the hot air convection type dryer, and obtained the cured film.

 次いで、化学粗化するために、膨潤液として、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル:200ml/L、水酸化ナトリウム:5g/Lの水溶液を調製し、80℃に加温して10分間浸漬処理した。次に、粗化液として、過マンガン酸カリウム:60g/L、水酸化ナトリウム:40g/Lの水溶液を調製し、80℃に加温して15分間浸漬処理した。引き続き、中和液(塩化スズ(SnCl):30g/L、塩化水素:300ml/L)の水溶液を調製し、40℃に加温して5分間浸漬処理し、過マンガン酸カリウムを還元した。 Subsequently, in order to perform chemical roughening, an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether: 200 ml / L, sodium hydroxide: 5 g / L was prepared as a swelling liquid, heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes. Next, an aqueous solution of potassium permanganate: 60 g / L and sodium hydroxide: 40 g / L was prepared as a roughening solution, heated to 80 ° C. and immersed for 15 minutes. Subsequently, an aqueous solution of a neutralizing solution (tin chloride (SnCl 2 ): 30 g / L, hydrogen chloride: 300 ml / L) was prepared, heated to 40 ° C. and immersed for 5 minutes to reduce potassium permanganate. .

 化学粗化後の、絶縁樹脂表面(加熱処理後の、非感光層(非感光層がない場合には、感光層))の表面粗さRaを、株式会社菱化システム製マイクロマップMN5000型を用いて測定した。評価結果を表2及び3に示す。 The surface roughness Ra of the surface of the insulating resin (non-photosensitive layer (photosensitive layer when no non-photosensitive layer is present) after the heat treatment) after chemical roughening is measured using a micromap MN5000 model manufactured by Ryoka System Co., Ltd. And measured. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3.

 硬化した絶縁樹脂表面上に導体層を形成するために、まず、塩化鉛(PdCl)を含む無電解めっき用触媒アクチベーターネオガント834(アトテック・ジャパン株式会社製、商品名)を35℃に加温して5分間浸漬処理し、無電解銅めっき用であるめっき液プリントガントMSK-DK(アトテック・ジャパン株式会社製、商品名)に室温で15分間浸漬し、更に硫酸銅電解めっきを行った。その後、アニールを180℃で60分間行い、厚さ20μmの導体層を形成した。導体層にエッチング処理によって、幅10mm、長さ50mmの領域を形成し、この領域の一端を導体層(銅層)と硬化した絶縁樹脂との界面で10mm剥がした。次いで、剥がした導体層をつかみ具でつまみ、シリコンウエハーの厚み方向(垂直方向)に引張り速度50mm/分、室温で引き剥がした時の荷重(ピール強度)を測定した。評価結果を表2及び3に示す。なお、本明細書において、室温とは25℃を示す。 In order to form a conductor layer on the cured insulating resin surface, first, an electroless plating catalyst activator Neogant 834 (Atotech Japan Co., Ltd., trade name) containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ) is set to 35 ° C. Heat and immerse for 5 minutes, immerse in plating solution Print Gantt MSK-DK (trade name, manufactured by Atotech Japan Co., Ltd.) for electroless copper plating for 15 minutes at room temperature, and perform copper sulfate electrolytic plating It was. Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 μm. A region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured insulating resin. Next, the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured. The evaluation results are shown in Tables 2 and 3. In this specification, room temperature means 25 ° C.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000016

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000017

 表2から明らかなように、実施例A1~A13は解像性が良好であり、ピール強度が0.3kN/m以上と高い接着強度を示した。一方、実施例と比較して、比較例A1~A5はピール強度が低く、比較例A6~A15は解像度が劣っていることが分かった。 As is clear from Table 2, Examples A1 to A13 had good resolution and high adhesive strength with a peel strength of 0.3 kN / m or more. On the other hand, it was found that Comparative Examples A1 to A5 had lower peel strength and Comparative Examples A6 to A15 had inferior resolution as compared with the Examples.

<実施例B1~B8、比較例B1~B7>
(合成例B1)エポキシ樹脂の合成
 温度計及び撹拌機を取り付けたフラスコに、ビスフェノールA228g(1.00モル)と1,6-ヘキサンジオールジビニルエーテル92g(0.85モル)とを仕込み、120℃まで1時間かけて昇温した後、更に120℃で6時間反応させて透明半固形の変性多価フェノール類400gを得た。次に、温度計、滴下ロート、冷却管、及び撹拌機を取り付けたフラスコに、上記変性多価フェノール類400gとエピクロルヒドリン925g(10モル)とを、n-ブタノール185gに溶解させた。その後、窒素ガスパージを施しながら、65℃に昇温した後、共沸する圧力まで減圧して、49質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液122g(1.5モル)を5時間かけて滴下した。次いで、同じ条件(65℃、共沸する圧力)下で0.5時間撹拌した。この間、共沸により留出してきた留出分をディーンスタークトラップで分離して、水層を除去し、有機層を反応系内に戻しながら反応させた。その後、未反応のエピクロルヒドリンを減圧蒸留して留去させ、粗エポキシ樹脂を得た。得られた粗エポキシ樹脂にメチルイソブチルケトン1000gとn-ブタノール100gとを加え溶解させた。得られた溶液に10質量%水酸化ナトリウム水溶液20gを添加して80℃で2時間反応させた後に、300gの水で水洗を3回繰り返した。3回水洗した後、洗浄液のpHが中性であることを確認した。次いで、共沸によって系内を脱水し、精密ろ過を経た後に溶媒を減圧下で留去して、透明液体のエポキシ樹脂A-1:457gを得た。エポキシ当量は403であった。
<Examples B1 to B8, Comparative Examples B1 to B7>
(Synthesis Example B1) Synthesis of Epoxy Resin A flask equipped with a thermometer and a stirrer was charged with 228 g (1.00 mol) of bisphenol A and 92 g (0.85 mol) of 1,6-hexanediol divinyl ether at 120 ° C. The mixture was heated up to 1 hour, and further reacted at 120 ° C. for 6 hours to obtain 400 g of a transparent semi-solid modified polyhydric phenol. Next, 400 g of the modified polyphenols and 925 g (10 mol) of epichlorohydrin were dissolved in 185 g of n-butanol in a flask equipped with a thermometer, a dropping funnel, a condenser, and a stirrer. Thereafter, the temperature was raised to 65 ° C. while purging with nitrogen gas, and then the pressure was reduced to an azeotropic pressure, and 122 g (1.5 mol) of a 49 mass% sodium hydroxide aqueous solution was added dropwise over 5 hours. Subsequently, it stirred for 0.5 hour under the same conditions (65 degreeC, the pressure to azeotrope). During this time, the distillate distilled by azeotropic distillation was separated with a Dean-Stark trap, the aqueous layer was removed, and the reaction was carried out while returning the organic layer to the reaction system. Thereafter, unreacted epichlorohydrin was distilled by distillation under reduced pressure to obtain a crude epoxy resin. To the obtained crude epoxy resin, 1000 g of methyl isobutyl ketone and 100 g of n-butanol were added and dissolved. After adding 20 g of 10 mass% sodium hydroxide aqueous solution to the obtained solution and making it react at 80 degreeC for 2 hours, the water washing with 300 g of water was repeated 3 times. After washing three times with water, it was confirmed that the pH of the cleaning solution was neutral. Subsequently, the system was dehydrated by azeotropic distillation, and after passing through microfiltration, the solvent was distilled off under reduced pressure to obtain 457 g of a transparent liquid epoxy resin A-1. The epoxy equivalent was 403.

<樹脂組成物の溶液(ワニス)の調製>
(調製例1)
 (A)成分であるエポキシ樹脂A-1:24.2g、(A)成分であるビフェニルアラルキル型エポキシ樹脂(日本化薬株式会社製、エポキシ当量:290)17.4g、(B-2)成分である1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテート(四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名「2PZ-CNS」)0.3g及び(E)成分であるエステル基含有樹脂(DIC株式会社、商品名「EXB-9460S」、エステル当量:223)27gを溶媒であるメチルエチルケトン40gに溶解してワニスc-Iを得た。
<Preparation of resin composition solution (varnish)>
(Preparation Example 1)
(A) component epoxy resin A-1: 24.2 g, (A) component biphenyl aralkyl type epoxy resin (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., epoxy equivalent: 290) 17.4 g, component (B-2) 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate (trade name “2PZ-CNS” manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) and ester group-containing resin (DIC Co., Ltd., product) 27 g of the name “EXB-9460S”, ester equivalent: 223) was dissolved in 40 g of methyl ethyl ketone as a solvent to obtain varnish c-I.

(調製例2)
 (A)成分であるエポキシ樹脂A-1:49g、(B-2)成分である1-シアノエチル-2-フェニルイミダゾリウムトリメリテート(四国化成工業株式会社製、商品名「2PZ-CNS」)0.15g及び(E)成分であるエステル基含有樹脂(DIC株式会社、商品名「EXB-9460S」、エステル当量:223)27gを溶媒であるメチルエチルケトン40gに溶解してワニスc-IIを得た。
(Preparation Example 2)
Component (A): Epoxy resin A-1: 49 g, Component (B-2): 1-cyanoethyl-2-phenylimidazolium trimellitate (manufactured by Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd., trade name “2PZ-CNS”) 0.15 g and 27 g of ester group-containing resin (DIC Corporation, trade name “EXB-9460S”, ester equivalent: 223) as component (E) were dissolved in 40 g of methyl ethyl ketone as a solvent to obtain varnish c-II. .

(調製例3)
 (D)成分であるシリカ(日本アエロジル株式会社製、商品名「AEROSIL R202」、一次粒径の平均:約14nm)0.25gを更に加え、分散機(吉田機械興業株式会社製、商品名「ナノマイザー」)を用いて分散させた以外は調製例1と同様の操作を行い、ワニスc-IIIを得た。
(Preparation Example 3)
Further, 0.25 g of silica (made by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., trade name “AEROSIL R202”, average primary particle size: about 14 nm) is added as a component (D), and a disperser (made by Yoshida Kikai Co., Ltd., trade name “ A varnish c-III was obtained in the same manner as in Preparation Example 1 except that the dispersion was performed using a nanomizer ").

<感光性組成物の溶液(ワニス)の調製>
 ノボラック樹脂(F-1~F-2)100質量部に対し、アルコキシアルキル化合物(G-1)、グリシジルオキシ基又はアクリロイルオキシ基を有する化合物(H-1、H-3)、光感応性酸発生剤(I-1)、溶剤(メチルエチルケトン)、及び無機フィラー(D’-1)を表4に示した所定量(単位:質量部)にて配合し、ワニスd-I~d-IIIを得た。
<Preparation of solution (varnish) of photosensitive composition>
Alkoxyalkyl compound (G-1), compound having glycidyloxy group or acryloyloxy group (H-1, H-3), photosensitive acid with respect to 100 parts by mass of novolak resins (F-1 to F-2) A generator (I-1), a solvent (methyl ethyl ketone), and an inorganic filler (D′-1) were blended in predetermined amounts (unit: parts by mass) shown in Table 4, and varnishes dI to d-III were added. Obtained.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000018

<ドライフィルムの作製1:実施例B1~B7及び比較例B1~B6>
 上記で得られた樹脂組成物の溶液を、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(ユニチカ株式会社製)製品名「TR-1」)(支持体)上に厚みが均一になるように塗布し、100~140℃の熱風対流式乾燥機で10分間乾燥して、乾燥後の膜厚が0.5μm、1μm、1.5μmとなるように非感光層を形成した。次に、非感光層上に上記で得られた感光性組成物の溶液を厚みが均一になるように塗布し、90℃の熱風対流式乾燥機で10分間乾燥して、非感光層上に、乾燥後の膜厚が10μmである感光層を形成した。感光層上にポリプロピレンフィルム(タマポリ株式会社製、製品名「NF-15」)(保護層)を貼り合わせ、ドライフィルムをそれぞれ得た。作製したドライフィルムの構成を表5に示す。なお、表5において、例えば実施例B1では、支持体上に、ワニスc-Iを用いて形成した非感光層(厚み:1μm)と、ワニスd-Iを用いて形成した感光層(厚み:10μm)と、保護層とをこの順で備えるドライフィルムを作製したことを意味する。その他の実施例及び比較例も、それぞれ対応する樹脂組成物の溶液及び/又は感光性組成物の溶液を用いて、ドライフィルムを作製した。
<Preparation of Dry Film 1: Examples B1 to B7 and Comparative Examples B1 to B6>
The solution of the resin composition obtained above was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film (manufactured by Unitika Co., Ltd.) product name “TR-1”) (support) so as to have a uniform thickness, and was heated at 100 to 140 ° C. It dried for 10 minutes with the hot air convection type dryer, and formed the non-photosensitive layer so that the film thickness after drying might be 0.5 micrometer, 1 micrometer, and 1.5 micrometers. Next, the solution of the photosensitive composition obtained above is applied on the non-photosensitive layer so that the thickness is uniform, and dried for 10 minutes in a hot air convection dryer at 90 ° C. A photosensitive layer having a thickness of 10 μm after drying was formed. A polypropylene film (manufactured by Tamapoly Co., Ltd., product name “NF-15”) (protective layer) was bonded onto the photosensitive layer to obtain dry films. Table 5 shows the configuration of the produced dry film. In Table 5, for example, in Example B1, a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 1 μm) formed using varnish c-I and a photosensitive layer (thickness: formed using varnish d-I) on the support. 10 μm) and a dry film provided with a protective layer in this order. In other examples and comparative examples, dry films were prepared using the corresponding resin composition solution and / or the photosensitive composition solution, respectively.

<評価用積層体の作製>
 上記ドライフィルムの保護層を剥離しながら、感光層が6インチのシリコンウエハーのシリコン表面に接するようにラミネートした。ラミネートは、連プレス式真空ラミネータ(株式会社名機製作所製、商品名「MVLP-500」)を用いて、圧着圧力0.4MPa、プレス熱板温度90℃、真空引き時間30秒間、ラミネートプレス時間40秒間、気圧4kPa以下で行った。次いで、支持体を剥離して、評価用積層体を得た。
<Preparation of evaluation laminate>
While peeling off the protective layer of the dry film, lamination was performed so that the photosensitive layer was in contact with the silicon surface of a 6-inch silicon wafer. Lamination is performed using a continuous press type vacuum laminator (trade name “MVLP-500” manufactured by Meiki Seisakusho Co., Ltd.), pressure bonding pressure 0.4 MPa, press hot plate temperature 90 ° C., evacuation time 30 seconds, laminating press time. Forty seconds, the pressure was 4 kPa or less. Subsequently, the support was peeled off to obtain an evaluation laminate.

<解像性の評価>
 上述の方法で作製した評価用積層体を露光した。露光は、i線ステッパー(キヤノン株式会社製、商品名「FPA-3000iW」)を用いてi線(365nm)で、マスクを介して、縮小投影露光を行った。マスクとしては、ビアパターンサイズzμmφ(z=20、30、80)を有するものを用いた。また、露光量は、100~3000mJ/cmの範囲で、100mJ/cmずつ変化させながら、縮小投影露光を行った。
<Evaluation of resolution>
The evaluation laminated body produced by the above-mentioned method was exposed. Exposure was reduced projection exposure through a mask with i-line (365 nm) using an i-line stepper (trade name “FPA-3000iW” manufactured by Canon Inc.). A mask having a via pattern size z μmφ (z = 20, 30, 80) was used. The exposure amount is in the range of 100 ~ 3000mJ / cm 2, while changing by 100 mJ / cm 2, was subjected to the reduction projection exposure.

 次いで、露光された感光層を75℃で8分間加熱し(露光後ベーク)、2.38質量%テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド水溶液を用いて最短現像時間(感光層の未露光部が除去される最短時間)の4倍に相当する時間でスプレーすることで、感光層の未露光部を除去した(現像処理)。現像処理後、熱風対流式乾燥機にて180℃で60分間加熱処理した。加熱処理後、金属顕微鏡を用いて形成されたビアパターンを観察した。非感光層を含めて、20μmφのビアパターンが開口されているものを「A」、30μmφのビアパターンが開口されているものを「B」、80μmφのビアパターンが開口されているものを「C」、開口されていないものを「D」として評価した。評価結果を表5に示す。また、実施例B6の、現像処理後及び加熱処理後のビアの、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)写真を、それぞれ図5及び図6に示す。図5に示されるように、現像により感光層の未露光部が除去された際に、未露光部上の非感光層が破れて、現像後の感光層及び非感光層を貫通する穴が形成されていた。また、図6に示されるように、現像後に加熱処理を行うと、図5に示される非感光層の破れた部分が穴の壁面に融着してビアが形成された。なお、現像は、現像機のノズルはフルコーンタイプを使用し、0.15MPaの圧力でスプレーした。上記試験片とノズル先端の距離は6cmであり、試験片の中心とノズルの中心が一致するように配置した。 Next, the exposed photosensitive layer is heated at 75 ° C. for 8 minutes (post-exposure baking), and the shortest development time using the 2.38 mass% tetramethylammonium hydroxide aqueous solution (the shortest time at which the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is removed) The unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer was removed (development processing) by spraying for a time corresponding to four times the (time). After the development process, the film was heat-treated at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes in a hot air convection dryer. After the heat treatment, the via pattern formed using a metal microscope was observed. Including the non-photosensitive layer, “A” indicates that the via pattern of 20 μmφ is opened, “B” indicates that the via pattern of 30 μmφ is opened, and “C” indicates that the via pattern of 80 μmφ is opened. ”, Those not opened were evaluated as“ D ”. The evaluation results are shown in Table 5. Moreover, the scanning electron microscope (SEM) photograph of the via | veer after development processing and heat processing of Example B6 is shown in FIG.5 and FIG.6, respectively. As shown in FIG. 5, when the unexposed portion of the photosensitive layer is removed by development, the non-photosensitive layer on the unexposed portion is torn and a hole that penetrates the developed photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer is formed. It had been. As shown in FIG. 6, when heat treatment was performed after development, the torn part of the non-photosensitive layer shown in FIG. 5 was fused to the wall surface of the hole to form a via. In the development, a full cone type nozzle was used and sprayed at a pressure of 0.15 MPa. The distance between the test piece and the nozzle tip was 6 cm, and the center of the test piece was aligned with the center of the nozzle.

<化学粗化後の接着強度(ピール強度)の評価>
 上記の方法で作製した評価用積層体に対して、化学粗化するために、膨潤液として、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル:200ml/L、水酸化ナトリウム:5g/Lの水溶液を調製し、70℃に加温して10分間浸漬処理した。次に、粗化液として、過マンガン酸カリウム:60g/L、水酸化ナトリウム:40g/Lの水溶液を調製し、70℃に加温して5分間浸漬処理した。引き続き、中和液(塩化スズ(SnCl):30g/L、塩化水素:300ml/L)の水溶液を調製し、40℃に加温して5分間浸漬処理し、過マンガン酸カリウムを還元した。
<Evaluation of adhesive strength (peel strength) after chemical roughening>
To chemically roughen the evaluation laminate produced by the above method, an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether: 200 ml / L, sodium hydroxide: 5 g / L was prepared as a swelling liquid and heated to 70 ° C. It was heated and immersed for 10 minutes. Next, an aqueous solution of potassium permanganate: 60 g / L and sodium hydroxide: 40 g / L was prepared as a roughening solution, heated to 70 ° C. and immersed for 5 minutes. Subsequently, an aqueous solution of a neutralizing solution (tin chloride (SnCl 2 ): 30 g / L, hydrogen chloride: 300 ml / L) was prepared, heated to 40 ° C. and immersed for 5 minutes to reduce potassium permanganate. .

 無電解めっきの前処理として、コンディショナー液「CLC-601」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に60℃で5分間浸漬し、その後水洗し、プリディップ液「PD-201」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に室温にて2分間浸漬した。次に、塩化鉛(PdCl)を含む無電解めっき用触媒である「HS-202B」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に、室温で10分間浸漬処理したのち、水洗し、無電解銅めっき液である「CUST-201めっき液」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に室温にて15分間浸漬し、更に硫酸銅電解めっきを行った。
 その後、アニールを180℃で60分間行い、厚さ20μmの導体層を形成した。導体層にエッチング処理によって、幅10mm、長さ50mmの領域を形成し、この領域の一端を導体層(銅層)と硬化した絶縁樹脂との界面で10mm剥がした。次いで、剥がした導体層をつかみ具でつまみ、シリコンウエハーの厚み方向(垂直方向)に引張り速度50mm/分、室温で引き剥がした時の荷重(ピール強度)を測定した。評価結果を表5に示す。なお、本明細書において、室温とは25℃を示す。
As a pretreatment for electroless plating, it was immersed in conditioner solution “CLC-601” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 5 minutes at 60 ° C., then washed with water, and pre-dip solution “PD-201” (Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.). The product was immersed in a product (trade name) for 2 minutes at room temperature. Next, it was immersed in “HS-202B” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), a catalyst for electroless plating containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ), at room temperature for 10 minutes, washed with water, and electroless copper The plate was immersed in “CUST-201 plating solution” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 15 minutes at room temperature, and further subjected to copper sulfate electrolytic plating.
Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 μm. A region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured insulating resin. Next, the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured. The evaluation results are shown in Table 5. In this specification, room temperature means 25 ° C.

<紫外線照射後の接着強度(ピール強度)の評価>
 実施例B1~B7及び比較例B1~B6の接着強度の評価において、化学粗化の代わりに紫外線照射を行い、また、無電解めっきの前処理の条件を一部変更して同様の評価を行った。接着強度の評価について、以下に説明する。
<Evaluation of adhesive strength (peel strength) after UV irradiation>
In the evaluation of the adhesive strengths of Examples B1 to B7 and Comparative Examples B1 to B6, UV irradiation was performed instead of chemical roughening, and the same evaluation was performed by partially changing the pretreatment conditions for electroless plating. It was. The evaluation of adhesive strength will be described below.

 上述の方法で作製した硬化膜に対して紫外線照射を行った。紫外線照射は、コンベア式紫外線照射装置を用いて、メタルハライドランプ(最大波長350~380nm)にて、3000mJ/cmの露光量で行った。 The cured film produced by the above method was irradiated with ultraviolet rays. The ultraviolet irradiation was performed using a conveyor type ultraviolet irradiation apparatus with a metal halide lamp (maximum wavelength 350 to 380 nm) at an exposure amount of 3000 mJ / cm 2 .

 次いで、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル:200ml/L、水酸化ナトリウム:5g/Lの水溶液を調製し、70℃に加温して10分間浸漬処理した。その後、水洗し、無電解めっきの前処理として、コンディショナー液「CLC-601」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に60℃で5分間浸漬し、その後、水洗し、プリディップ液「PD-201」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に室温にて2分間浸漬した。次に、塩化鉛(PdCl)を含む無電解めっき用触媒である「HS-202B」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に、室温で10分間浸漬処理したのち、水洗し、無電解銅めっき液である「CUST-201めっき液」(日立化成株式会社製、商品名)に室温にて15分間浸漬し、更に硫酸銅電解めっきを行った。その後、アニールを180℃で60分間行い、厚さ20μmの導体層を形成した。導体層にエッチング処理によって、幅10mm、長さ50mmの領域を形成し、この領域の一端を導体層(銅層)と硬化した樹脂膜との界面で10mm剥がした。次いで、剥がした導体層をつかみ具でつまみ、シリコンウエハーの厚み方向(垂直方向)に引張り速度50mm/分、室温で引き剥がした時の荷重(ピール強度)を測定した。評価結果を表5に示す。なお、本明細において、室温とは25℃を示す。 Next, an aqueous solution of diethylene glycol monobutyl ether: 200 ml / L, sodium hydroxide: 5 g / L was prepared, heated to 70 ° C. and immersed for 10 minutes. Thereafter, it is washed with water, and immersed in a conditioner solution “CLC-601” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 5 minutes at 60 ° C. as a pretreatment for electroless plating, then washed with water, and pre-dip solution “PD- 201 "(trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 2 minutes at room temperature. Next, it was immersed in “HS-202B” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), a catalyst for electroless plating containing lead chloride (PdCl 2 ), at room temperature for 10 minutes, washed with water, and electroless copper The plate was immersed in “CUST-201 plating solution” (trade name, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.) for 15 minutes at room temperature, and further subjected to copper sulfate electrolytic plating. Thereafter, annealing was performed at 180 ° C. for 60 minutes to form a conductor layer having a thickness of 20 μm. A region having a width of 10 mm and a length of 50 mm was formed on the conductor layer by etching, and one end of this region was peeled off by 10 mm at the interface between the conductor layer (copper layer) and the cured resin film. Next, the peeled conductor layer was pinched with a gripper, and the load (peel strength) when peeled at room temperature at a pulling speed of 50 mm / min in the thickness direction (vertical direction) of the silicon wafer was measured. The evaluation results are shown in Table 5. In addition, in this specification, room temperature shows 25 degreeC.

<導体層エッチング後の絶縁樹脂層の表面粗さ(Ra)の評価>
 上述の方法で作製した導体層に対して、エッチング処理を行うことで、導体層を除去した試験片を作製した。キーエンス株式会社製超深度形状測定顕微鏡「VK-8500型」を用いて、試験片中の異なる箇所3点について、測定長さ149μm、倍率2000倍、分解能0.05μmの条件で測定し、絶縁樹脂の表面粗さ(Ra)を測定した。評価結果を表5に示す。
<Evaluation of surface roughness (Ra) of insulating resin layer after conductor layer etching>
A test piece from which the conductor layer was removed was produced by performing an etching process on the conductor layer produced by the method described above. Using an ultra-deep shape measurement microscope “VK-8500 type” manufactured by Keyence Corporation, three different points in the test piece were measured under conditions of a measurement length of 149 μm, a magnification of 2000 times, and a resolution of 0.05 μm. The surface roughness (Ra) of was measured. The evaluation results are shown in Table 5.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019

<ドライフィルムの作製2:実施例B8及び比較例B7>
 上記で得られた樹脂組成物の溶液を、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(ユニチカ株式会社製)製品名「TR-1」)(支持体)上に厚みが均一になるように塗布し、100~140℃の熱風対流式乾燥機で10分間乾燥して、乾燥後の膜厚が1μm、となるように非感光層を形成した。次に、非感光層上に感光性組成物(日立化成株式会社製、商品名:レイテック(登録商標)FZ-2700GA)(d-IV)を100℃、0.5Mpaの条件でラミネートすることで張り合わせ、ドライフィルムを得た。作製したドライフィルムの構成を表6に示す。なお、表3において、実施例B8では、支持体上に、ワニスc-Iを用いて形成した非感光層(厚み:1μm)と、感光性組成物(d-IV)を用いて形成した感光層(厚み:10μm)と、保護層とをこの順で備えるドライフィルムを作製したことを意味する。比較例B7は、感光性組成物(日立化成株式会社製、商品名:レイテック(登録商標)FZ-2700GA)(d-IV)をそのまま用いた。解像性、表面粗さ及びピール強度については、上述の方法により評価した。評価結果を表6に示す。
<Preparation of Dry Film 2: Example B8 and Comparative Example B7>
The solution of the resin composition obtained above was applied on a polyethylene terephthalate film (manufactured by Unitika Co., Ltd.) product name “TR-1”) (support) so as to have a uniform thickness, and was heated at 100 to 140 ° C. It dried for 10 minutes with the hot air convection type dryer, and formed the non-photosensitive layer so that the film thickness after drying might be set to 1 micrometer. Next, a photosensitive composition (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Raytec (registered trademark) FZ-2700GA) (d-IV) is laminated on the non-photosensitive layer under the conditions of 100 ° C. and 0.5 MPa. Lamination was performed to obtain a dry film. Table 6 shows the structure of the produced dry film. In Table 3, in Example B8, a non-photosensitive layer (thickness: 1 μm) formed using varnish c-I and a photosensitive composition (d-IV) formed on the support were used. It means that a dry film comprising a layer (thickness: 10 μm) and a protective layer in this order was produced. In Comparative Example B7, a photosensitive composition (manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name: Raytec (registered trademark) FZ-2700GA) (d-IV) was used as it was. The resolution, surface roughness and peel strength were evaluated by the methods described above. The evaluation results are shown in Table 6.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020

 表5及び表6から明らかなように、実施例B1~B8は解像性が良好であり、化学粗化及び紫外線照射後のいずれにおいても、ピール強度が0.4kN/m以上と高い接着強度を示した。基材の樹脂の表面粗さ(Ra)は、紫外線照射プロセスでは0.1μmと平滑であった。実施例と比較して、比較例B1~B3は解像性に劣り、ビアを開口することはできなかった。また、比較例B4~B7はピール強度が劣る結果となった。 As is clear from Tables 5 and 6, Examples B1 to B8 have good resolution, and have high peel strength of 0.4 kN / m or more after both chemical roughening and ultraviolet irradiation. showed that. The surface roughness (Ra) of the base resin was as smooth as 0.1 μm in the ultraviolet irradiation process. Compared with the examples, Comparative Examples B1 to B3 were inferior in resolution, and the vias could not be opened. Further, Comparative Examples B4 to B7 resulted in poor peel strength.

 本開示のドライフィルムは、配線板材料の層間絶縁膜、又は半導体素子等の層間絶縁膜(パッシベーション膜)に用いられる部材として適用される。特に、上記ドライフィルムは、めっき銅との接着性及び解像性がいずれも良好であるため、細線化及び高密度化された高密度パッケージ基板等に好適に用いられる。 The dry film of the present disclosure is applied as a member used for an interlayer insulating film of a wiring board material or an interlayer insulating film (passivation film) of a semiconductor element or the like. In particular, the above-mentioned dry film is suitable for high-density package substrates and the like that are thinned and densified because both the adhesiveness and resolution with the plated copper are good.

 1…支持体、3…非感光層、5…感光層、7…保護層、10…ドライフィルム、100A…多層プリント配線板、101…基材、102、107…配線パターン、103…層間絶縁層、104…開口部、105…シード層、106…樹脂パターン、108…ソルダーレジスト。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Support body, 3 ... Non-photosensitive layer, 5 ... Photosensitive layer, 7 ... Protective layer, 10 ... Dry film, 100A ... Multilayer printed wiring board, 101 ... Base material, 102, 107 ... Wiring pattern, 103 ... Interlayer insulation layer 104, opening, 105, seed layer, 106, resin pattern, 108, solder resist.

Claims (19)

 感光層と非感光層とを備え、前記非感光層が熱硬化性樹脂を含む、ドライフィルム。 A dry film comprising a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer, wherein the non-photosensitive layer contains a thermosetting resin.  前記非感光層が、
 (A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、
 (B-1)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化剤、及び
 (C)成分:アミド基又はイミド基を有する樹脂を含む、請求項1に記載のドライフィルム。
The non-photosensitive layer is
(A) component: epoxy resin,
The dry film according to claim 1, comprising (B-1) component: an epoxy resin curing agent, and (C) component: a resin having an amide group or an imide group.
 前記非感光層が、
 (E)成分:エステル基含有化合物
を更に含有する、請求項2に記載のドライフィルム。
The non-photosensitive layer is
(E) Component: The dry film of Claim 2 which further contains an ester group containing compound.
 前記非感光層が、
 (A)成分:エポキシ樹脂、
 (B-2)成分:エポキシ樹脂硬化促進剤、及び
 (E)成分:エステル基含有化合物を含む、請求項1に記載のドライフィルム。
The non-photosensitive layer is
(A) component: epoxy resin,
The dry film according to claim 1, comprising (B-2) component: an epoxy resin curing accelerator, and (E) component: an ester group-containing compound.
 前記非感光層が、
 (D)成分:無機フィラー
を更に含有する、請求項1~4のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。
The non-photosensitive layer is
Component (D): The dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 4, further comprising an inorganic filler.
 前記感光層の厚みが1~50μmである、請求項1~5のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。 6. The dry film according to claim 1, wherein the photosensitive layer has a thickness of 1 to 50 μm.  前記非感光層の厚みが10μm以下である、請求項1~6のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the non-photosensitive layer has a thickness of 10 µm or less.  前記感光層が
 (F)成分:フェノール性水酸基を有する樹脂、
 (G)成分:芳香環、複素環及び脂環からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも一種を有し、かつ、メチロール基又はアルコキシアルキル基を有する化合物、
 (H)成分:アクリロイルオキシ基、メタクリロイルオキシ基、グリシジルオキシ基及び水酸基から選択される一種以上の官能基を2つ以上有する脂肪族化合物、及び
 (I)成分:光感応性酸発生剤
を含有する、請求項1~7のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。
The photosensitive layer is (F) component: a resin having a phenolic hydroxyl group,
(G) component: a compound having at least one selected from the group consisting of an aromatic ring, a heterocyclic ring and an alicyclic ring, and having a methylol group or an alkoxyalkyl group,
(H) component: an aliphatic compound having two or more functional groups selected from acryloyloxy group, methacryloyloxy group, glycidyloxy group and hydroxyl group, and (I) component: containing a photosensitive acid generator The dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein
 前記(F)成分100質量部に対して、前記(H)成分を20~70質量部含有する、請求項8に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to claim 8, comprising 20 to 70 parts by mass of the component (H) with respect to 100 parts by mass of the component (F).  前記感光層が
 (D’)成分:無機フィラーを更に含有する、請求項1~9のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。
The dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 9, wherein the photosensitive layer further contains (D ') component: an inorganic filler.
 前記(D’)成分が、一次粒径の平均が100nm以下の無機フィラーである、請求項10に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to claim 10, wherein the component (D ') is an inorganic filler having an average primary particle size of 100 nm or less.  前記(D’)成分が、シリカである、請求項10又は11に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to claim 10 or 11, wherein the component (D ') is silica.  層間絶縁層形成用である、請求項1~12のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルム。 The dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 12, which is used for forming an interlayer insulating layer.  請求項1~13のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルムを用いて得られる硬化物。 A cured product obtained using the dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 13.  請求項1~13のいずれか一項に記載のドライフィルムを用いて、基材上に感光層と非感光層とをこの順で形成する工程と、
 前記感光層を所定のパターンに露光する工程と、
 露光された感光層を現像し、加熱処理する工程を含む、レジストパターンの形成方法。
Using the dry film according to any one of claims 1 to 13 to form a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer in this order on a substrate;
Exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern;
A method for forming a resist pattern, comprising a step of developing and heat-treating an exposed photosensitive layer.
 露光した前記感光層を現像する前に加熱処理する工程を更に含む、請求項15に記載のレジストパターンの形成方法。 The method for forming a resist pattern according to claim 15, further comprising a step of performing a heat treatment before developing the exposed photosensitive layer.  感光層と非感光層とを備えるドライフィルムであって、
 基材上に前記感光層と前記非感光層とをこの順で形成し、前記感光層を露光し、前記ドライフィルムを現像することにより、感光層の未露光部が溶出して未露光部上の非感光層が破れ、現像後の加熱処理によって非感光層が破れた箇所にビアが形成できる、ドライフィルム。
A dry film comprising a photosensitive layer and a non-photosensitive layer,
The photosensitive layer and the non-photosensitive layer are formed in this order on the substrate, the photosensitive layer is exposed, and the dry film is developed. A dry film in which vias can be formed where the non-photosensitive layer is broken and the non-photosensitive layer is broken by heat treatment after development.
 基材と、感光層と、熱硬化性樹脂を含む非感光層がこの順で積層された、積層体。 A laminate in which a base material, a photosensitive layer, and a non-photosensitive layer containing a thermosetting resin are laminated in this order.  感光性組成物を基材上に塗布して感光層を形成する工程と、
 熱硬化性樹脂を含む樹脂組成物を前記感光層上に塗布して非感光層を形成する工程と、
 前記感光層を所定のパターンに露光する工程と、
 露光された感光層を現像し、加熱処理する工程を含む、レジストパターンの形成方法。
Applying a photosensitive composition on a substrate to form a photosensitive layer;
Applying a resin composition containing a thermosetting resin on the photosensitive layer to form a non-photosensitive layer;
Exposing the photosensitive layer to a predetermined pattern;
A method for forming a resist pattern, comprising a step of developing and heat-treating an exposed photosensitive layer.
PCT/JP2016/058045 2015-03-27 2016-03-14 Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern Ceased WO2016158362A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015066538A JP2018087832A (en) 2015-03-27 2015-03-27 Dry film, cured product, laminate and method for forming resist pattern
JP2015-066538 2015-03-27
JP2015087885A JP2018087835A (en) 2015-04-22 2015-04-22 Dry film, cured product, laminate and method for forming resist pattern
JP2015-087885 2015-04-22

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016158362A1 true WO2016158362A1 (en) 2016-10-06

Family

ID=57006763

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/058045 Ceased WO2016158362A1 (en) 2015-03-27 2016-03-14 Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern

Country Status (2)

Country Link
TW (1) TW201641276A (en)
WO (1) WO2016158362A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018163602A1 (en) * 2017-03-09 2018-09-13 Jsr株式会社 Method for producing plated shaped structure and photosensitive resin composition for production of plated shaped structures
US11140768B2 (en) 2019-04-10 2021-10-05 At&S Austria Technologie & Systemtechnik Aktiengesellschaft Component carrier with high passive intermodulation performance
WO2022075432A1 (en) * 2020-10-08 2022-04-14 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Photosensitive multilayer resin structure, dry film, cured product and electronic component
JP2022062573A (en) * 2020-10-08 2022-04-20 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Photosensitive laminated resin structures, dry films, cured products and electronic components
WO2023145973A1 (en) * 2022-01-31 2023-08-03 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Dry film, cured product, interlayer insulation layer comprising cured product, and wiring board
WO2024150564A1 (en) * 2023-01-11 2024-07-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Pattern forming method and method for producing electronic device
US12381138B2 (en) 2018-09-10 2025-08-05 AT&SAustria Technologie &Systemtechnik Aktiengesellschaft Component carrier with a photoimageable dielectric layer and a structured conductive layer being used as a mask for selectively exposing the photoimageable dielectric layer with electromagnetic radiation

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018030544A1 (en) 2016-08-12 2018-02-15 日立化成株式会社 Interlayer insulating film and method for producing same
JP6954992B2 (en) * 2017-03-21 2021-10-27 三井金属鉱業株式会社 Wiring board manufacturing method
CN115837790B (en) * 2022-12-02 2024-12-27 杭州福斯特电子材料有限公司 Photosensitive dry film laminate, preparation method and circuit board

Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003330178A (en) * 2002-05-10 2003-11-19 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd Photosensitive dry film resist having epoxy resin layer and method for manufacturing the same
JP2004145013A (en) * 2002-10-24 2004-05-20 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd Photosensitive dry film resist having adhesive layer and its manufacturing method
JP2008241741A (en) * 2007-03-23 2008-10-09 Jsr Corp Positive dry film for solder resist, cured product thereof, and circuit board and electronic component with the cured product
JP2009210972A (en) * 2008-03-06 2009-09-17 Jsr Corp Transfer film and pattern forming method
JP2010197996A (en) * 2009-01-30 2010-09-09 Jsr Corp Photosensitive insulating resin composition, cured product of the composition, and method of producing insulating film
JP2010238704A (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-10-21 Sanyo Chem Ind Ltd Interlayer insulating resin film for printed wiring board
WO2013094606A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2013-06-27 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Dry film, printed wiring board using same, method for producing printed wiring board, and flip chip mounting substrate
WO2013099885A1 (en) * 2011-12-27 2013-07-04 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Dry film, layered structure, printed wiring board, and process for producing layered structure

Patent Citations (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2003330178A (en) * 2002-05-10 2003-11-19 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd Photosensitive dry film resist having epoxy resin layer and method for manufacturing the same
JP2004145013A (en) * 2002-10-24 2004-05-20 Kanegafuchi Chem Ind Co Ltd Photosensitive dry film resist having adhesive layer and its manufacturing method
JP2008241741A (en) * 2007-03-23 2008-10-09 Jsr Corp Positive dry film for solder resist, cured product thereof, and circuit board and electronic component with the cured product
JP2009210972A (en) * 2008-03-06 2009-09-17 Jsr Corp Transfer film and pattern forming method
JP2010197996A (en) * 2009-01-30 2010-09-09 Jsr Corp Photosensitive insulating resin composition, cured product of the composition, and method of producing insulating film
JP2010238704A (en) * 2009-03-30 2010-10-21 Sanyo Chem Ind Ltd Interlayer insulating resin film for printed wiring board
WO2013094606A1 (en) * 2011-12-22 2013-06-27 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Dry film, printed wiring board using same, method for producing printed wiring board, and flip chip mounting substrate
WO2013099885A1 (en) * 2011-12-27 2013-07-04 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Dry film, layered structure, printed wiring board, and process for producing layered structure

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018163602A1 (en) * 2017-03-09 2018-09-13 Jsr株式会社 Method for producing plated shaped structure and photosensitive resin composition for production of plated shaped structures
JPWO2018163602A1 (en) * 2017-03-09 2019-12-26 Jsr株式会社 Method for producing plated object, and photosensitive resin composition for producing plated object
US11249398B2 (en) 2017-03-09 2022-02-15 Jsr Corporation Method for producing plated shaped structure and photosensitive resin composition for production of plated shaped structures
JP7147741B2 (en) 2017-03-09 2022-10-05 Jsr株式会社 Method for manufacturing plated model
US12381138B2 (en) 2018-09-10 2025-08-05 AT&SAustria Technologie &Systemtechnik Aktiengesellschaft Component carrier with a photoimageable dielectric layer and a structured conductive layer being used as a mask for selectively exposing the photoimageable dielectric layer with electromagnetic radiation
US11140768B2 (en) 2019-04-10 2021-10-05 At&S Austria Technologie & Systemtechnik Aktiengesellschaft Component carrier with high passive intermodulation performance
WO2022075432A1 (en) * 2020-10-08 2022-04-14 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Photosensitive multilayer resin structure, dry film, cured product and electronic component
JP2022062573A (en) * 2020-10-08 2022-04-20 太陽インキ製造株式会社 Photosensitive laminated resin structures, dry films, cured products and electronic components
WO2023145973A1 (en) * 2022-01-31 2023-08-03 太陽ホールディングス株式会社 Dry film, cured product, interlayer insulation layer comprising cured product, and wiring board
WO2024150564A1 (en) * 2023-01-11 2024-07-18 富士フイルム株式会社 Pattern forming method and method for producing electronic device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201641276A (en) 2016-12-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2016158362A1 (en) Dry film, cured product, laminate, and method for forming resist pattern
JP2017211555A (en) Dry film and method for forming resist pattern
CN105474097B (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, semiconductor device, and method for forming resist pattern
EP2940527B1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive film, and method for forming resist pattern
US9829791B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, semiconductor device and method for forming resist pattern
JPWO2018164233A1 (en) Photosensitive element, semiconductor device, and method of forming resist pattern
JP2014204023A (en) Method for manufacturing structure with conductor wiring, structure with conductor wiring manufactured by the method, thermosetting resin composition, resin film, photosensitive resin composition, and dry film resist
WO2016157622A1 (en) Dry film, cured product, semiconductor device, and method for forming resist pattern
JP2018087832A (en) Dry film, cured product, laminate and method for forming resist pattern
JP6600962B2 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, semiconductor device, and method for forming resist pattern
WO2016157605A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, cured product, and method for forming resist pattern
JP2018087835A (en) Dry film, cured product, laminate and method for forming resist pattern
WO2016159133A1 (en) Dry film, cured product, semiconductor device, and method for forming resist pattern
WO2018070489A1 (en) Photosensitive element, semiconductor device, and resist pattern formation method
WO2016159160A1 (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, cured product, and method for forming resist pattern
JP6790461B2 (en) Method for forming photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, semiconductor device and resist pattern
JP2018169548A (en) Photosensitive resin laminate, and method for forming resist pattern
JP2018084684A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, cured product, semiconductor device and method for forming resist pattern
JP2018091879A (en) Dry film, cured product, and method for forming resist pattern
JP2018091877A (en) Photosensitive resin composition, photosensitive element, cured product and method for forming resist pattern

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16772245

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16772245

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP